JP6675811B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of controlling a transition to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

In the gaming machine, it is determined whether or not a game ball (an example of a game medium) wins (passes) in a predetermined area provided on the game board to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player. When the result of this determination is affirmative, there is a case where the game is shifted to a specific game state.
In this specific game state, the variable prize device provided on the game board is configured to execute a round game in which the variable prize device is opened a predetermined number of times and then becomes a closed state a plurality of times. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out by winning the game balls.
In such a gaming machine, the first and second variable winning devices are provided, the second variable winning device is provided with a V zone (an example of a specific area), and when a game ball wins in the V zone during the specific gaming state, After the end of this specific game state, the probability that it is determined to shift to the specific game state is relatively high, that is, the probability variation game state, that is, the probability that the probability of being determined to shift to the specific game state is higher than that of the non-probability game state is high. A gaming machine that transitions to a state (an example of a special gaming state) has been proposed (see Patent Literature 1).

JP 2014-57892 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, the interest is reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest between when a game medium passes through a specific area and a prize is won and when a prize is not won. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
A gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention,
A game board having a game area,
A variable winning device that is displaceable between a first state in which game media can be easily received and a second state in which game media cannot be easily received, and has a specific area through which game media can pass;
A passage area through which game media can pass,
An open state in which the game medium easily passes through the passage area, and an open / close member that can be displaced to a closed state in which the game medium hardly passes;
Display means capable of variably displaying identification information based on the passage of the game medium to the passage area;
On the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the display means, a game state transition control means capable of controlling transition to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player,
A round game execution means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning device is displaced between the first state and the second state in the big hit game state shifted under the control of the game state shift control means;
In the big hit game state shifted by the control of the game state shift control means, based on that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means, after the end of the big hit game state A probability change game state control means capable of controlling the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the display means is relatively high,
In the big hit game state shifted by the control of the game state shift control means, based on that the game medium did not pass through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means, the big hit game state After the end, non-probable variable game state control means capable of controlling to a non-probable variable game state having a relatively low probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the display means,
After the end of the big hit game state shifted by the control of the game state shift control means, a time-short game state control means that can be controlled to a time-short game state including a state in which the opening and closing member is relatively easily opened,
The number of times that the identification information is variably displayed by the display means after being controlled to the time-saving game state by the time-saving game state control means has a specific number of times, and the opening and closing member is relatively opened. Non-time saving game state control means that can be controlled to a non-time saving game state including a difficult state,
Production mode determination means capable of determining any of a plurality of production modes,
Effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means,
With
In the case where the game medium passes through the specific area and is controlled to the probable variable game state by the probable variable game state control means after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to control the specific number of probable variable game states and the time reduction game state. And
If the non-probable variable game state is controlled by the non-probable variable game state control means after the end of the big hit game state without passing the game medium to the specific area, the non-probable variable game state and the time saving game state of the specific number of times are controlled. It is possible to
In the case where the game medium passes through the specific area, and in the case where the game medium does not pass through the specific area, an effect mode that can be executed after the end of the big hit game state is provided,
The display of the identification information immediately before the start of the big hit gaming state that has shifted to the effect mode, is displayed during the effect mode immediately after the display that causes the shift to the effect mode is performed. Is possible,
The presentation execution means in the jackpot gaming state is shifted by the control of the gaming state transition control means only when rendering mode before transition to the jackpot gaming state is a specific effect mode, in the jackpot gaming state A gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect that prompts the game medium to be launched so that the game medium goes to the specific area before the game medium passes through the specific area.

A gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention,
Production mode determination means capable of determining any of the production modes from a plurality of production modes including the first production mode;
Effect mode control means controllable to the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means,
Effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode controlled by the effect mode control means,
A game board having a game area,
A first variable winning device that is provided in the game area and is displaceable between a first state in which game media can be easily received and a second state in which game media cannot be easily received;
A second variable prize device provided in the game area, which is displaceable between a first state in which game media can be easily received and a second state in which game media cannot be easily received, and has a specific area through which game media can pass;
A passage area provided in the game area, through which a game medium can pass;
A moving member that is provided in the game area and is movable between an open state in which the game medium easily passes through the passage area and a closed state in which the game medium does not easily pass,
Display means capable of variably displaying identification information based on the passage of the game medium to the passage area;
On the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the display means, a game state control means capable of controlling transition to a specific game state advantageous to the player,
A first advantageous game execution means capable of executing a first advantageous game in which the first variable winning device is set to the first state a predetermined number of times in a specific game state shifted by control of the game state control means;
A second advantageous game execution means capable of executing a second advantageous game in which the second variable winning device is set to the first state a predetermined number of times in the specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means;
In the specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the second advantageous game executed by the second advantageous game execution means, after the specific game state ends, the display means Special game state control means that can be controlled to a special game state in which identification information is easily stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
With
The special game state control means can control the special game state until the number of times the identification information is changed and displayed by the display means reaches a predetermined number after the end of the specific game state,
In the specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means,
A first specific game state in which the first advantageous game execution means executes a predetermined number of first advantageous games, and the second advantageous game execution means executes a predetermined number of second advantageous games;
The second advantageous game execution means executes only the second advantageous game a predetermined number of times, and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the execution of the second advantageous game, the special game state control means executes the special game state control means after the end of the specific game state. A second specific game state controlled to a special game state;
The second advantageous game execution means executes only the second advantageous game a predetermined number of times, and it is determined by the specific game state transition determination means that the transition is made by the specific game state transition determination means, regardless of whether the special game state control means controls the special game state. Irrespective of whether the game medium has passed through the specific area during execution of the second advantageous game and whether the game medium has passed through the specific gaming state, is more disadvantageous than before the transition to the specific gaming state. A third specific game state not controlled by the state,
The production mode determining means is
As an effect mode after the end of the second specific game state, on condition that the game medium passes through the specific area during the second advantageous game executed in the second specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means. , The first production mode can be determined,
As an effect mode after the end of the third specific game state, on condition that the game medium does not pass through the specific area during the second advantageous game executed in the third specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means. , It is possible to determine an effect mode different from the first effect mode,
An effect mode different from the first effect mode can be determined on condition that the special game state controlled by the special game state control means ends when the effect mode control means controls the first effect mode. Yes,
The effect mode control means is controlled by the game state control means to shift to the second specific game state or the third specific game state when controlling to the first effect mode, and is executed in the specific game state controlled to shift. A gaming machine characterized by being controllable to a first effect mode as an effect mode after the end of a specific game state, on condition that a game medium passes through a specific area during the second advantageous game.

According to this configuration, the first effect mode ends when the special game state ends, but when the game medium passes through the specific area during the second specific game state, the special game state can be performed a predetermined number of times again. Therefore, if the passing of the game medium to the specific area during the second specific game state is repeated, the special game state does not end, and the first effect mode does not need to end.
On the other hand, even if the game medium passes through the specific area during the third specific game state, the predetermined number of special game states cannot be achieved again. Therefore, if the passage of the game medium to the specific area in the third specific game state is repeated, the special game state will eventually end and the first effect mode will end.
However, in the second specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state, even if the game medium passes through the specific area, the first rendering mode continues, so it is apparently apparent which specific gaming state has been established. .
Therefore, even if the first production mode is recognized by the confirmation of the production, the first production mode is suddenly ended or the first production mode is continued for a much longer period than expected. In other words, the special game state ends suddenly or continues for a much longer period than expected, making it difficult to recognize how long the special game state will continue. It is possible to improve interest in the state.
Further, in the third specific game state, the special game state does not end due to the game medium not passing through the specific area, but the game medium does not pass through the specific area during the third specific game state. As in the case of the end of the special game state, the first effect mode ends. By shifting the effect mode in this way, it becomes even more difficult to recognize that the game is in the special game state.

The gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention further includes:
When the game medium passes through the specific area during the second advantageous game executed in the second specific game state and the third specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means, the effect that the game medium has passed through the specific area Equipped with a notifying means capable of notifying
In the second specific game state and the third specific game state which are shifted by the control of the game state control means, the displacement mode of the second variable winning device is the same or substantially the same.

  In this configuration, in the second specific game state and the third specific game state, the notification performed when the game medium passes through the specific area is the same, and the displacement mode of the second variable winning device is the same or substantially the same. is there. In this way, by making it more difficult to recognize the second specific game state and the third specific game state, it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize how long the special game state will continue, and to further interest in the special game state. Can be improved.

The gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention further includes:
The effect mode determining means is executed in the second specific game state and the third specific game state, which is shifted under the control of the game state control means when the effect mode control means controls the first effect mode. When the game medium does not pass through the specific area during the 2 advantageous game, the second effect mode can be determined as the effect mode after the end of the specific game state in which the second advantageous game is executed,
The effect mode control means is characterized in that when the second effect mode is determined by the effect mode determining means, the effect mode control means can be controlled to the second effect mode.

  In this configuration, the special game state ends in the second specific game state but does not end in the third specific game state due to the game medium not passing through the specific area. Further, in this configuration, the second effect mode can be determined when the game medium does not pass through the specific area regardless of whether the game mode is the second specific game state or the third specific game state. In other words, the special game state may or may not end due to the game medium not passing through the specific area, but in any case, the special game state is ended because the second effect mode is controlled. It can be made difficult to recognize whether or not it has been done.

The gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention further includes:
In the specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means, the second advantageous game execution means executes only the second advantageous game a predetermined number of times, and is controlled by the special game state control means to the special game state. Irrespective of whether or not the specific game state transition determining means determines that the transition is determined to be the same, and whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific area during the execution of the second advantageous game, the specific game After the end of the state, a fourth specific game state which is not controlled to a disadvantageous game state than before the transition of the specific game state is included,
The effect mode determination means is provided when the game medium does not pass through the specific area during the second advantageous game executed in the fourth specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means. When the special game state is controlled by the special game state control means after the end, the first effect mode can be determined.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to notify the user of whether or not the game is in the special game state by not allowing the game medium to pass through the specific area in the fourth specific game state.

A gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention,
Production mode determination means capable of determining any of the production modes from a plurality of production modes including the first production mode;
Effect mode control means controllable to the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means,
Effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode controlled by the effect mode control means,
A game board having a game area,
A variable winning device that is provided in the game area, is displaceable between a first state in which game media can be easily received, and a second state in which game media cannot be easily received, and has a specific area through which game media can pass;
A passage area provided in the game area, through which a game medium can pass;
A moving member that is provided in the game area and is movable between an open state in which the game medium easily passes through the passage area and a closed state in which the game medium does not easily pass,
Display means capable of variably displaying identification information based on the passage of the game medium to the passage area;
On the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the display means, a game state control means capable of controlling transition to a specific game state advantageous to the player,
In a specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means, an advantageous game execution means capable of executing an advantageous game for setting the variable winning device to the first state a predetermined number of times;
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the advantageous game executed by the advantageous game execution means in the specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means, the identification information is displayed on the display means after the end of the specific game state. Special game state control means that can be controlled to a special game state that is easily stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
With
The special game state control means can control the special game state until the number of times the identification information is changed and displayed by the display means reaches a predetermined number after the end of the specific game state,
In the specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means,
When the advantageous game execution means executes the predetermined number of advantageous games, and the game medium passes through the specific area during the execution of the advantageous game, the special game state is controlled by the special game state control means after the end of the specific game state. A first specific gaming state,
The advantage game execution means executes a predetermined number of advantageous games, and the same probability of being determined to shift by the specific game state shift determination means is the same regardless of whether or not the special game state control means controls the special game state. And, regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific area during execution of the advantageous game, after the end of the specific game state, the game state is not controlled to be more disadvantageous than before the transition to the specific game state. And a specific game state,
The production mode determining means is
As an effect mode after the end of the first specific game state, on the condition that the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous game executed in the first specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means, 1 production mode can be determined,
As an effect mode after the end of the second specific game state, on the condition that the game medium does not pass through the specific area during the advantageous game executed in the second specific game state shifted by the control of the game state control means, It is possible to determine a production mode different from 1 production mode,
An effect mode different from the first effect mode can be determined on condition that the special game state controlled by the special game state control means ends when the effect mode control means controls the first effect mode. Yes,
The effect mode control means is controlled to shift to the first specific game state or the second specific game state by the game state control means while controlling to the first effect mode, and is executed in the specific game state controlled to shift. A gaming machine characterized by being controllable to a first effect mode as an effect mode after the end of a specific game state, on condition that a game medium passes through a specific area during the advantageous game being played.

According to this configuration, the first effect mode ends when the special game state ends, but when the game medium passes through the specific area during the first specific game state, the special game state can be performed a predetermined number of times again. Therefore, if the passage of the game medium to the specific area in the first specific game state is repeated, the special game state does not end, and the first effect mode does not need to end.
On the other hand, even if the game medium passes through the specific area during the second specific game state, the special game state cannot be performed a predetermined number of times again. Therefore, if the passage of the game medium to the specific area in the second specific game state is repeated, the special game state will eventually end, and the first effect mode will end.
However, in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, even if the game medium passes through the specific area, the first rendering mode continues, so it is apparently unknown which specific gaming state has been established. .
Therefore, even if the first production mode is recognized by the confirmation of the production, the first production mode is suddenly ended or the first production mode is continued for a much longer period than expected. In other words, the special game state ends suddenly or continues for a much longer period than expected, making it difficult to recognize how long the special game state will continue. It is possible to improve interest in the state.
In the second specific game state, the special game state does not end due to the game medium not passing through the specific area. However, the game medium does not pass through the specific area during the second specific game state. As in the case of the end of the special game state, the first effect mode ends. By shifting the effect mode in this way, it becomes even more difficult to recognize that the game is in the special game state.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest when a game medium passes through a specific area to win a prize and when no prize is won.

1 is an external perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a winning device mechanism of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a control circuit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the specification of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a 1 round opening and closing pattern of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a 1 round opening and closing pattern of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a displacement member operation pattern of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a special winning opening opening and closing pattern and an interval time between rounds of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the hit pattern 1 and the hit pattern 4 of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the hit pattern 2 and the hit pattern 3 of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the hit pattern 7 and the hit pattern 8 of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram showing a game state and a production mode of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a timer update process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows switch input processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st starting port switch check processing of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd starting port switch check processing of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big winning opening switch check processing of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big winning opening switch check processing of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol storage check process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation time management processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before the big winning opening re-opening of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing during opening of a special winning opening of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the sub control circuit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of the gaming machine concerning 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a timer update process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a command analysis process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit effect pattern determination processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows V winning a prize information processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the during-round effect processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the round effect production processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st production mode change processing of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd production mode change processing of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge error notification process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a production screen and a production screen flow in a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a production screen and a production screen flow in a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a production screen and a production screen flow in a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a special winning opening opening and closing pattern and an interval time between rounds of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a winning device mechanism of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a winning device mechanism of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a winning device mechanism of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the specification of the game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a 1 round opening and closing pattern of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a displacement member operation pattern of a game machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a special winning opening opening and closing pattern and an interval time between rounds of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a game state determination table of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram showing a game state and an effect mode of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows timer update processing of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check processing of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big winning opening switch check processing of the game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management processing of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a special winning opening of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows timer update processing of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the command analysis processing of the game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit effect pattern determination processing of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows V winning a prize information processing of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process in a round of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the round effect production processing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect processing of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows production mode change processing of the game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a production screen and a production screen flow in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a production screen and a production screen flow in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a winning device mechanism of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a gaming board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a view showing a winning device mechanism of the gaming machine. FIG. 6 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Game structure]
First, the structure of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a main body frame base on which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which a game ball can roll and flow is detachably provided. A body frame 2 having a board 2a (also referred to as a body frame base), and a table frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a table frame base) provided with an opening 3h (hereinafter, referred to as a table frame opening) through which the game board 1 can be viewed. ), A front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3). Is provided with a rear frame base plate (not shown) detachably provided, and a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the side opposite to the player). ing.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via a main frame hinge 2b. Note that FIG. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 2 and the main frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. , Which are accommodated in the outer frame 6 and are not shown.

  The front frame 3 has a front frame base plate 3a and various surface frame components provided on the front frame base plate 3a. The surface frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decorative member 15, left decorative member 16) and the like. It should be noted that the surface frame constituting members are not limited to these, but include all members constituting the surface frame 3. In the plate unit 8, respective cover members (upper plate upper cover 8a, lower plate cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

  In the front frame 3, a protective glass 7 having transparency is provided in the above-described front frame opening 3h. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a. In a state where the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the front frame 3 is configured to face the front (front) side of the game board 1 and cover the front (front) side. In the upper part of the front frame 3, speakers 10a and 10b for performing sound effects are provided on both sides above the front frame opening 3h.

  In addition, a decorative member for improving aesthetic appearance is provided on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. In addition, as an example of the decorative member, a top decoration 14 having a built-in patrol lamp later described is provided above the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. A right decorative member 15 (for example, upper right lens 15a, right middle lens 15b, right panel cover 15c, etc.) and a left decorative member 16 (for example, left outer lens 16a, etc.) are provided.

  Inside the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16, a light emitting means (for example, a lamp / LED 27, etc.) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 7) described later is provided (see FIG. 7). . The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 and is perceived from the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 as, for example, radiated light or diffused light having an excellent appearance. Thereby, a change can be given to the display mode by light, so that interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a dish unit 8 is provided below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The plate unit 8 includes an upper plate 17 for storing lending balls and prize balls, and a lower plate 18 provided below the upper plate 17 and capable of storing, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full. Is provided.

  The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls, and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover an upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls, an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover an upper portion of the upper plate main body 17p, An upper plate decorative member for improving the beauty of the upper plate 17 is provided. As an example of the upper plate decorative member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, a upper plate front decoration 17c, and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Has a shape that is bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a through the front side and toward the lower plate 18 halfway toward the right side.

  A payout port 20 for paying out game balls to the upper plate 17 and an outlet (not shown) for discharging game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the rear side of the table frame base plate 3a are provided in the front frame base plate 3a. ), And a supply port 21 for supplying the game balls discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the rear side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball passage cover (shown in the drawing) that forms a ball passage for game balls to be paid out from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 7) and a ball passage by connecting the discharge port and the supply port 21. (Abbreviation). When the game balls are paid out from the payout device 83, the game balls are sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the game balls are paid out, but the upper plate 17 becomes so large that the game balls stay near the payout port 20. When the ball is full, or when the ball release button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are discharged from the discharge port through the ball passage and the supply port 21 to the lower plate. Sent to 18.

  In the present embodiment, a plating member is used for decoration of the front surface of the gaming machine, and a plating member 17b is also used for the upper decoration 17c for decorating the front portion of the upper plate 17. The use of the plating member 17b enhances the decorative effect of the external appearance design of the gaming machine, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  The upper plate upper cover 8a includes a ball lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 7) for lending game balls (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided to change the display mode of various effects by performing operations (pressing operation and rotating operation) by the player during the game. The arrangement (position and orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, but as an example in the drawing, the push operation button 9A is projected vertically from the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the outer periphery of the push operation button 9A is provided. 2 shows an operation unit 9 configured to arrange a jog dial 9B.

  The front frame 3 has a surface (front surface) on the left side (that is, a side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) from the player side, and is provided with an illegal wire such as a piano wire. It is possible to assume a situation in which a member invades and various types of structures built on the back surface of the front frame 3 near the back side of the portion cause illegal acts by the illegal member.

  In order to prevent such misconduct, a cover member with a wiring holding function (not shown) is provided on a portion of the back surface of the front frame 3 where the above-described intrusion by the illegal member is performed. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion for holding wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion for covering a substrate (not shown) built on the back surface of the front frame 3, and a cover member for illegal members such as a piano wire. It is integrated with a fraud prevention unit for preventing intrusion. According to this, it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having three functions of the wiring holding, the board covering portion, and the fraud prevention. Therefore, it is necessary to separately prepare members for each of these functions. And the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided on the main body frame base plate 2a. The main frame member includes the launching device 26, the speaker 10c, various control boards and relay boards, and the like. The body frame constituting members are not limited to these, and all members constituting the body frame 2 are included.

  In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a opposed to the above-described front frame opening 3h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a firing device 26 for firing game balls is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

  The firing device 26 includes a panel body 26a for disposing the firing device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a firing handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. And a firing drive device (not shown) for firing a game ball, which is disposed on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the rear side of the main body. In other words, the launch device 26 implements launch means.

  Note that a cutout 3p for exposing the firing device 26 (the panel body 26a and the firing handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the firing device 26 (the panel body 26 a and the firing handle 26 b) is exposed through the notch 3 p of the front frame 3, and is adjacent to the dish unit 8 described above. Be positioned. Such a firing device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

  The firing handle 26b is provided in the support portion (not shown), a handle gup 26d rotatably attached to the support portion and rotatable clockwise / counterclockwise, and provided in the support portion. A firing stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the ball, a firing stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning on / off the firing stop switch, and a cover disposed over the opening of the handle grip 26d. And a handle cap 26h.

  When the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated clockwise, the driving force of the firing driving device is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle), and stored in the upper plate 17 by the driving force at that time. The played game ball is launched toward the game area 1p of the game board 1 (see FIG. 3). At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is operated, the firing driving device is controlled to stop, whereby the firing of the game ball can be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by a payout / firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 7) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 7). A spring member (not shown) for constantly urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction is provided inside the firing device 26, and the player can adjust the elasticity of the spring member. The game ball is fired by rotating the handle grip 26d clockwise in opposition. The firing interval of the game balls is 0.66 seconds.

  When the player interrupts the game and releases his / her hand from the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start time position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is pressed by a projection (not shown) of the handle grip 26d, the firing of the game ball is stopped.

  Here, as a method of increasing or decreasing the firing intensity of the game ball, the resistance of a firing volume (not shown) is changed in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of a handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b, and a firing solenoid (not shown) is used. Although it is known that the firing power of the game ball is increased or decreased by changing the power supplied to the firing handle 26b, the firing device 26 of the present embodiment has a turning operation of a handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b. And a gear mechanism (not shown) for winding up (clamping up) the firing spring (not shown). In the firing device 26, the amount of rotation of the hoisting gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b to increase or decrease the degree of winding (tightening) of the firing spring. The firing intensity of the is increased or decreased.

  The speaker 10c is provided in the lower center of the main body frame 2 so as to perform sound effects. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through a speaker cover 10k provided in a portion of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, a portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). Has become.

  The game board 1 is disposed in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which shot game balls can roll down. doing. The game board 1 is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property (for example, polycarbonate or the like), but may be formed of a material having no light-transmitting property such as a veneer board.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 6, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first starting port 32, a second starting port 33, a blade member 34 for opening and closing the second starting port 33, a passage gate 35, The first large winning opening 36A, the first large winning opening 36B, the second large winning opening 37A, the first large winning opening shutter 361A that opens and closes the first large winning opening 36A, the first large opening and closing the first large winning opening 36B. The winning opening shutter 361B, the second winning opening shutter 371A that opens and closes the second winning opening 37A, the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B located below the first winning opening 36A, the outlets 38X, 38Y, the specific A displacement member 39 for opening and closing the region 38A, a plurality of general winning openings 40, an out opening 41, an upper movable effecting member 42A, a lower movable effecting member 42B, a cover member 43, a rolling region 372 provided on the cover member 43, and a liquid crystal. Display device 4, and a LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the passing gate 35, the first winning port 36A, the first winning port 36B, the second winning port 37A, the specific area A winning area is formed by 38A and the general winning opening 40. FIG. 3 shows a state where the cover member 43 is removed. In the present embodiment, the first special winning opening 36A and the first special winning opening 36B are appropriately referred to as a first special winning opening 36.

  The guide rail 30 includes an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is arranged so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper portion of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is disposed on the left side of the game board 1 inside the outer rail. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side.

  The stage 31 is for distributing the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The game balls fired by the firing device 26 flow down toward the lower part of the game board 1 while changing their traveling directions due to collision with game nails (not shown) or the stage 31 driven into the game board 1. In this process, the game ball wins any one of the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the first winning port 36A, the first winning port 36B, the second winning port 37A, and the general winning port 40. When the player does not win, or when the player does not win after passing through the passage gate 35, the player is discharged from the out port 41 and collected.

  Note that the winning means that the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, a situation (for example, opening of a second starting port 33 described later, a symbol lottery, a prize ball, etc.) which is advantageous for the player is given by the game ball passing through or entering the prize area. Means to do. At this time, passing of the prize area by the game ball means mere passing, and entry of the prize area by the game ball means to collect the game ball separately from the out port 41. Since the winning is detected by the passing of the game ball by the sensor switch, the passing and the entering ball are substantially the same. Therefore, the passing of the game ball to the winning area and the entering of the ball also lead to a winning. Therefore, in the following description, "passing" and "winning" have the same meaning for the winning area unless otherwise specified. Used. The passage of the game ball through the specific area 38A may be referred to as “V winning”.

  When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively small, the launching force given to the game ball is generally small, and the game ball mainly flows down the left side of the stage 31. When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally large, and the game ball mainly flows down the right side of the stage 31. Note that, in general, a method of hitting a game ball down the left side of the stage 31 is called “left hit”, and a method of hitting a game ball down the right side of the stage 31 is called “right hit”. A game ball (an example of a game medium fired in a predetermined direction) fired by “right hit” basically flows down the right side of the stage 31 and reaches the first special winning opening shutter 361A. When the special winning opening shutter 361A, the second special winning opening shutter 371A, and the first special winning opening shutter 361B are closed, the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, and the first special winning opening shutter 361B are provided. The upper part will roll sequentially.

  The first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 provide an opportunity for a lottery on condition that the game ball wins (enters), and displays the result of the lottery in the LED unit 5 or the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. It gives the opportunity to do so. In other words, the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 implement a passage area.

  The first starting port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 32, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected by the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 7).

  The second starting port 33 is provided immediately below the first starting port 32. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 33, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 33 is determined by the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected by the second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 7).

  The wing member 34 opens and closes so as to form a forwardly inclined position and a backward position in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and an open state in which a game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 33, and a second state. This is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball to the starting port 33. The blade member 34 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 7). In other words, the blade member 34 realizes an opening / closing member (moving member).

  The ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the one that operates to open and close the blade member 34 in the front-rear direction. For example, a so-called electric tulip type in which the starting port is opened by rotating the game board 1 in the left-right direction. Or a tongue-shaped member that opens and closes a starting port by horizontally moving the game board 1 in the front-rear direction.

  The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33. The winning of the game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 7). Note that even if a game ball wins in the passing gate 35, no prize ball is generated.

The first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37A are opened in a hit game state (big hit game state, small hit game state), which is a game state advantageous to the player.
The first large winning opening 36 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having a relatively small vertical and horizontal dimension so that game balls can be won one by one. A first special winning opening shutter 361A for opening and closing the first special winning opening 36A is provided near the first special winning opening 36A. The winning of the game ball to the first big winning opening 36A is detected by the first big winning opening first count switch 360A (see FIG. 7). A first special winning opening shutter 361B for opening and closing the first special winning opening 36B is provided near the first special winning opening 36B. The winning of the game ball to the first special winning opening 36B is detected by the first special winning opening second count switch 360B (see FIG. 7).

  The second big winning opening 37A is formed in the gaming board 1 as an opening having a relatively large horizontal dimension so that a plurality of gaming balls can win simultaneously. In the vicinity of the second special winning opening 37A, a second special winning opening shutter 371A for opening and closing the same is provided. The winning of the game ball into the second big winning opening 37A is detected by the second big winning opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 7).

The first special winning opening 36A, the first special winning opening 36B, and the second special winning opening 37A are provided substantially on the right side of the first starting opening 32. The second special winning opening 37A is provided between the first special winning opening 36A and the first special winning opening 36B. More specifically, the second special winning opening 37A is provided on the left side of the first special winning opening 36A and on the right side of the first special winning opening 36B, and is higher than the first special winning opening 36A and the first special winning opening 36B. It is provided at the top. In addition, the position where the first special winning opening 36A, the first special winning opening 36B, and the second special winning opening 37A are arranged is not limited to the above-described position, and may be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine. Can be.
Next, a description will be given of a positional relationship (a relationship of a ball winning position) through which a game ball can pass in each of the big winning ports. The position (height) that can pass through the first special winning opening 36A is the position where the “ball” is shown as shown in FIG. 5A, in other words, the first special winning opening shutter 361A is closed. The position (height) that can pass through the second big winning opening 37A is the position indicated by the “ball” as shown in FIG. 5C, in other words, It is the height of the upper surface in the state where the second big winning opening shutter 371A is closed. Similarly, the position (height) at which the first large winning opening 36B can pass is the height of the upper surface when the first large winning opening shutter 361B is closed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the position that can pass through the first special winning opening 36A and the position that can pass through the second special winning opening 37A are provided at the same or substantially the same height. A position that can pass through one big winning opening 36B is provided. Also, a path (region) from a position where a game ball can pass through each large winning opening to each large winning opening is referred to as an N-th passing region (N = 1, 2,...). In addition, the ball winning positions of each of the special winning openings are not limited to the above-described positional relationship. For example, the ball winning position of the first large winning opening 36A, the ball winning position of the second large winning opening 37A, and the ball winning position of the first large winning opening 36B may be provided in this order.

The first special winning opening shutter 361A moves horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, in other words, the first position for facilitating the passage of the game ball to the first special winning opening 36A, and the difficulty. The first large winning opening 36A is switched to an open state or a closed state by displacing the first large winning opening 36A, and is arranged to cover the first large winning opening 36A in the closed state. That is, the first special winning opening shutter 361A is changed to the first state in which the first special winning opening 36A can be changed to an open state in which game balls can be awarded, and the first large winning opening shutter 361A changes to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to achieve the winning of the game balls. It is driven by a special winning opening first shutter solenoid 3610A (see FIG. 7).
The first special winning opening shutter 361B moves horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, in other words, the first position for facilitating the passage of the game ball to the first special winning opening 36B, and the difficulty. The first large winning opening 36B is switched to an open state or a closed state by being displaced to the second position where the first large winning opening 36B is closed, and is arranged so as to cover the first large winning opening 36B in the closed state. That is, the first special winning opening shutter 361B is changed so as to change between an open state in which game balls can enter the first special winning opening 36B and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win game balls. It is driven by the special winning opening second shutter solenoid 3610B (see FIG. 7).
Further, in the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B, the opening and closing control is performed simultaneously, and the first special winning opening 36A and the first special winning opening 36B are simultaneously opened and closed.

  The second special winning opening shutter 371A opens and closes so as to form the forward and backward postures of the game board 1 in the front-rear direction, in other words, the passage of the game ball to the second special winning opening 37A. The second large winning opening 37A is switched to an open state or a closed state by being displaced between a first position where it is easy and a second position where it is difficult, and covers the second large winning opening 37A in the closed state. Are arranged as follows. That is, the second special winning opening shutter 371A is changed to an open state in which game balls can enter the second special winning opening 37A, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win game balls. It is driven by a special winning opening shutter solenoid 3710 (see FIG. 7).

  The specific area 38A is an area through which game balls that have won the first special winning opening 36A can pass thereafter, and the non-specific area 38B has a game that has won the first special winning opening 36A but has not passed through the specific area 38A. The ball and the game ball that has won the first big winning opening 36B are areas where the ball can pass thereafter, and are covered with the cover member 43. When the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 36A passes through the specific area 38A, it passes through the outlet 38X, is guided to the rear of the game board 1, and is collected. Game balls that have won the first big winning opening 36A but have not passed through the specific area 38A, and game balls that have won first big winning opening 36B, pass through the outlet 38Y and are guided to the back of the game board 1. Collected.

A first special winning opening first count switch 360A is disposed in correspondence with the first special winning opening 36A. Detected by 360A. A first special winning opening second count switch 360B is arranged corresponding to the first special winning opening 36B. Detected by 360B.
A specific area switch 380A is arranged corresponding to the specific area 38A, and the V winning of a game ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged corresponding to the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A is provided near the specific area 38A.

  The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A between an open state and a closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 is changed so as to change between an open state (easy state) where the V prize of the game ball into the specific area 38A is easy and a closed state (difficult state) where the V prize is impossible or difficult. It is driven by a solenoid 390 (see FIG. 7). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the game ball for which the V prize has become impossible passes through the non-specific area 38B.

In other words, the first big winning opening 36A, the first big winning opening 36B, the first big winning opening shutter 361A, the first big winning opening shutter 361B, the first big winning opening first shutter solenoid 3610A, the first big winning The mouth second shutter solenoid 3610B, the first special winning opening first count switch 360A, the first special winning opening second count switch 360B, the specific area 38A, and the specific area switch 380A implement a second variable winning device. The second variable prize winning device is displaceable between a first state in which game media can be easily received and a second state in which game media cannot be easily received, and has a specific area through which game media can pass.
The second large winning opening 37A, the second large winning opening shutter 371A, the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 3710, and the second large winning opening count switch 370 implement a first variable winning device. The first variable winning device can be displaced between a first state in which game media can be easily received and a second state in which game media cannot be easily received.
The displacement member 39 and the displacement member solenoid 390 implement a variable member.

  One or more general winning ports 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 40, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 7), though no lottery is performed. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the non-probability change / non-time saving game state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery are non-probability change as the normal game state controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later. There is a probable variable game state (special game state) that is higher than the non-time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state where the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is higher than the non-probable change / non-time-saving game state. When a lottery is won, the game shifts to a jackpot game state (an example of a specific game state).

  In the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is in a high probability state, so that the winning of the second starting opening 33 is facilitated by the support of the blade member 34 as the ordinary electric throw. This state is a so-called “electric support”, in which a reserve ball for a special symbol game, which will be described later, is easily accumulated, and loss of game balls due to winning in the second starting port 33 can be suppressed. More specifically, the time reduction gaming state is a state in which the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is relatively high (first time reduction gaming state), or a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is relatively short (second time saving game). (Playing state), and at least one of a state in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory is relatively long (a third time-short game state). For example, the time-saving gaming state includes a state in which the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state simultaneously advance in any combination. In such a time-saving gaming state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit gaming state is improved.

  After the big hit game state in which the V-prize has succeeded in the specific area 38A in the big hit game state, the game always transitions to the probability-changing / time-saving game state (the normal game state which is the probability-changing game state and the time-saving game state). It is configured not to shift to the probable change / non-time saving game state (the normal game state which is the non-probable change game state and the non-time saving game state). On the other hand, if the big hit gaming state ends without a V winning in the specific area 38A without succeeding in the non-V winning, the normal gaming state in which the non-probable changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are completed after the big hit gaming state ends. It is supposed to shift to.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the big hitting game state ends, for example, when the special symbol lottery (70 times the special symbol fluctuation display or stop display) is performed in the probable change / time saving game state, the non- It shifts to the probable change / non-time saving game state. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, for example, 30 or 70 special symbol lotteries (30 or 70 special symbol fluctuation display or stop display) are performed in the non-probable change / time saving gaming state. The game is shifted to a non-probable change / non-time saving game state. After the big hitting game state ends, the probable change / time saving game state may be maintained until the next big hitting game state is entered.
In the following, a certain-variable game state that is completed by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries as in the present embodiment is also described as an ST (Specia1 Time) game state.

  The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are retracted behind the game board 1 when not in operation, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. Are located in The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the center of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a rotating operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and emits light.

The cover member 43 is provided to form the first winning port 36A, the first winning port 36B, and the rolling area 372, and is attached below the passing gate 35. The cover member 43 forms a first special winning opening 36A and a first special winning opening 36B by opening a part of the upper end surface. A rolling area 372 is provided on the upper end surface of the cover member 43 between the first big winning opening 36A and the first big winning opening 36B. In the state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is located in the opening corresponding to the first big winning opening 36A. Such a cover member 43 is disposed so as to cover the first special winning opening first count switch 360A, the first special winning opening second count switch 360B, the specific area switch 380A, the non-specific area switch 380B, and the like.
The rolling region 372 is not limited to the configuration provided on the cover member 43. For example, a configuration provided on the game board 1 may be employed.

[Prize winning mechanism]
Here, the winning device mechanism of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 5A is a front view of the winning mechanism with the second winning opening shutter 371A closed (when closed), and FIG. 5B is a left side view of the upper part of the winning mechanism in FIG. Yes, (c) is a front view of the winning device mechanism in a state where the second big winning opening shutter 371A is opened (when opened), and (d) is a left side view of the upper portion of the winning device mechanism in (c). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, in the present embodiment, the winning device mechanism includes a first special winning opening first count switch 360A, a first special winning opening second count switch 360B, a first special winning opening shutter 361A, This is realized by including a first special winning opening shutter 361B, a second special winning opening shutter 371A, a rolling area 372, a specific area 38A, a non-specific area 38B, outlets 38X and 38Y, and a displacement member 39.

In the winning device mechanism, a first special winning opening shutter 361A for opening and closing the first special winning opening 36A is provided at the upper right corner. Below the first special winning opening shutter 361A (directly below in this example), a first special winning opening first count switch 360A, a displacement member 39, a specific area 38A, and a discharge opening 38X are sequentially provided. .
A rolling area 372 is provided at the lower left of the first special winning opening shutter 361A, and a first special winning shutter 361B is provided at the lower left of the rolling area 372. A first special winning opening second count switch 360B is provided below the first special winning opening shutter 361B (just below in this example).
In the winning mechanism, a non-specific area 38B and a discharge port 38Y are sequentially provided at the bottom.

  When the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the first special winning opening shutter 361B, and the second special winning opening shutter 371A are closed, the first special winning opening shutter 361A is in the upper part, the rolling area 372 is in the middle part, and the first special winning opening shutter 361A is in the middle part. Each component has a step-like shape, such as the special winning opening shutter 361B at the bottom. Therefore, when each shutter is closed, the game ball can roll in the order of the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, and the first special winning opening shutter 361B. Note that the present pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the game ball reaches the approximate center of the rolling area 372 in 2 to 2.1 seconds from the start of “right-hand” (start of the firing operation).

  Next, when the game ball reaches each of the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the second special winning opening shutter 371A, and the first special winning opening shutter 361B, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is opened. Will be described.

(When the game ball reaches the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the first special winning opening shutter 361A is open)
The game ball passes through the first special winning opening first count switch 360A and reaches the displacement member 39. At this time, when the displacement member 39 is open, the game ball passes through the specific area 38A and the discharge port 38X. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A, but passes through the non-specific area 38B provided below and the discharge port 38Y.

(When the game ball reaches the second special winning opening shutter 371A, the second special winning opening shutter 371A is open)
As shown in FIGS. 5C and 5D, the game ball passes through the second special winning opening 37A, is guided to the back side of the winning mechanism, and passes through the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. There is no.

(When the game ball reaches the first special winning opening shutter 361B, the first special winning opening shutter 361B is open)
After passing through the first special winning opening second count switch 360B, the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B and the discharge opening 38Y provided below. It should be noted that the game ball that has passed the first special winning opening second count switch 360B does not pass through the specific area 38A.

  Next, the LED unit 5 will be described with reference to FIG. The LED unit 5 notifies each player of the game state and the lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 6, a normal symbol display section 51, a normal symbol hold display section 52, a first special symbol display section 53, A second special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol reservation display unit 55, a second special symbol reservation display unit 56, and a round display unit 59 are provided.

  The ordinary symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33 by driving the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory when the game ball wins at the passing gate 35. The lottery result for "game" is displayed. The ordinary symbol display section 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can emit, for example, red light and blue light. In the ordinary symbol game, the LED lamp 511 illuminates in red when winning, and in the ordinary symbol game, illuminates in blue when a loss occurs. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display section 51 becomes, for example, a red lighting mode, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a winning of a game ball to the second starting port 33 is permitted. In addition, the lighting mode according to the winning and the loss of the normal symbol game may be another lighting mode, for example, the lighting state or the blinking state in the case of the winning, and the lighting state in the case of the loss. It may be.

  The normal symbol hold display unit 52 is turned on or off by the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524, so that a new game ball wins the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display. In this case, the number of times of execution of the variable display of the normal symbol which is suspended for performing the variable display by the normal symbol display unit 51 from the next time is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are usually located on the left side of the symbol display unit 51, and are arranged in a line with the LED lamp 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524, for example, when the hold number is “1”, the LED lamp 521 is turned on, and the LED lamps 522, 523, and 524 are turned off. When the hold number is “2”, the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on, and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of reservations is “3”, the LED lamps 521, 522, and 523 are turned on, and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of reservations is "4", all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are turned on.

  The first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54 show the result of the winning lottery for the “special symbol game”, and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs a variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “first special symbol”) serving as identification information in response to a prize of a game ball to the first starting port 32, and a first symbol. The result of the winning lottery based on winning in the starting opening 32 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol according to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs a variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “second special symbol”) serving as identification information when a game ball is awarded to the second starting port 33 as an opportunity. The result of the lottery based on the winning in the starting opening 33 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol according to the second special symbol. In other words, the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 realize an identification information display unit (display unit).

  The variable display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed by, for example, using a 7-segment LED or the like and repeatedly turning on / off each segment. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54. At this time, the plurality of winning symbols displayed in the first special symbol and the plurality of winning symbols displayed in the second special symbol have different modes. As the winning symbol of the first special symbol, a symbol that is a trigger for shifting to the big hit gaming state, such as “probable variation 1” or “probable variation 2” indicating that the game can be shifted to the probable variable gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. There are nominal jackpot symbols and nominal jackpot symbols such as “hour reduction 1” and “hour reduction 2” indicating that the game can be shifted to the non-probable and time-saving game state after the end of the big-hit game state (see FIG. 8). As the winning symbol of the second special symbol, a symbol that is a trigger for shifting to the big hit gaming state, such as "probable variation 3" to "probable variation 5" indicating that the game can shift to the probable variable gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. There is a nominal big hit symbol and a nominal small hit symbol such as "small hit 1" and "small hit 2" which trigger the transition to the so-called small hit gaming state (see FIG. 8). The first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54 are not limited to the 7-segment LED and the like, and may be, for example, a combination of turning on and off two or more LED lamps.

The first special symbol holding display section 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554. Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variable symbol for the special symbol game and a new game ball is won in the first starting port 32, the first special symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games is displayed for change. The number of times of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 which has been suspended (the number of suspensions) is displayed.
The second special symbol holding display section 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564. The first special symbol display section 53 is provided by turning on or off the LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564. Alternatively, when a new game ball is won in the second starting port 33 while the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a symbol for the special symbol game, the symbol is held for a symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games. The variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 also displays the number of times of execution (the number of suspensions).
Each of the first special symbol hold display section 55 and the second special symbol hold display section 56 is arranged vertically, and is located above the normal symbol hold display section 52. The display mode of the number of holds on the first special symbol hold display section 55 and the second special symbol hold display section 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of holds on the normal symbol hold display section 52.

  The first special symbol display section 55 and the second special symbol display section 56 are connected to the first opening 32 when the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54 is variably displayed. A game ball is detected by a first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 7) provided in a ball path leading to the ball or a second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 7) provided in a ball path leading to the second starting port 33. When it is performed, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol that has been variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, it is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 that has been suspended. The fluctuation display of the symbol is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the second The maximum number of variable display reservations on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 33 is four at maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is suspended for four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the main RAM 63 (FIG. 7) is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) as the start memory (start memory information), and the information of the held first special symbol game for the four times is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). 1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) are stored as start memory. Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held for four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area ( The information of the second special symbol game for four times, which is stored as the start memory at 0) and held, is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). It is memorized. Therefore, the maximum number of winnings held in both the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54, that is, the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33, is a maximum of eight.

  In addition, instead of the first special symbol holding display section 55 and the second special symbol holding display section 56, or in addition to the first special symbol holding display section 55 and the second special symbol holding display section 56, the liquid crystal display device 4 Alternatively, the holding of the winning in the first starting port 32 and the holding of the winning in the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

  The round display section 59 is lit when the hit symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games described later when the big hit game state is executed. The round display section 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the big hitting game state is executed by turning on or off the LED lamps 591, 592, 593. In the present embodiment, for example, when the number of rounds is 16 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “16R”), the LED lamp 591 is turned on, and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. When the number of rounds is 14 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “14R”), the LED lamp 592 is turned on, and the LED lamps 591 and 593 are turned off. When the number of rounds is eight (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “8R”), the LED lamp 593 is turned on, and the LED lamps 591 and 592 are turned off. When the number of rounds is two (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “2R”), the LED lamps 591 and 592 are turned on, and the LED lamp 593 is turned off. The number of rounds (number of rounds) may mean the total number of times the round game (round game) is executed, or may refer to the order number indicating the order in which the round games are sequentially executed. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, “16 rounds” or “16R”, “12 rounds”, or “12R” is described, and when the latter is meant, for example, “16R” or “12R” And so on. In the following description, “round game” may be simply referred to as “round”.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is disposed behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is disposed substantially at the center thereof so that a player can view the display area. In addition to the result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting port 33, various images related to the game, for example, identification symbols for staging, staging images in the normal playing state, staging during the big hitting state It displays images, effect images for demonstration display, and the like. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is configured to perform the fluctuation display of the identification information on condition that the game ball has won the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33. In other words, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes a display device, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 can issue a predetermined notification. ).

[Electrical configuration of gaming machine]
Next, a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 7, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW”, and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine has a main control circuit 60 as main control means for performing various controls related to the game, and a sub-control as sub-control means for performing effects such as an effect in accordance with the progress of the game. And a circuit 70.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 that is a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 that is a readable / writable memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmission unit, and a backup capacitor 67. It has. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (e.g., devices and switches) including the LED unit 5.

  The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 62. In other words, the main CPU 61 includes a specific game state transition determination unit, a game state control unit, a special game state control unit, a round game execution unit (a first round game execution unit and a second round game execution unit), and an advantageous game. Various means such as execution means (first advantageous game execution means and second advantageous game execution means) are realized.

  To the main control circuit 60, a first starting port switch 320 arranged behind the first starting port 32 is connected. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

  To the main control circuit 60, a second starting port switch 330 disposed behind the second starting port 33 is connected. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

  The first starting port switch 320 and the second starting port switch 330 generate a predetermined detection signal when it is determined that a prize has been won when detecting that a game ball has entered the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33. It is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

  A pass gate switch 350 disposed behind the pass gate 35 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When a game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 350, it is determined that the game ball has won the pass gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed on the ordinary symbol display section 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display section 51, an effect image for allowing the player to understand that the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is a winning is displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may make it.

  The pass gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as a winning when detecting that a game ball has passed through the pass gate 35. As a result, the passage gate switch 350 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a general winning opening left switch 400A and a general winning opening right switch 400B arranged behind the general winning opening 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a predetermined number of winning balls are played by the payout device 83.

The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first special winning opening first count switch 360A arranged corresponding to the first special winning opening 36A. The first special winning opening first count switch 360A is for counting the number of winning of game balls to the first special winning opening 36A. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the first large winning opening first count switch 360A, the payout device 83 sets the predetermined number of game balls as the winning ball through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. Dispense to plate 17 or lower plate 18.
Further, the main control circuit 60 is connected to a first special winning opening second count switch 360B arranged corresponding to the first special winning opening 36B. The first special winning opening second count switch 360B is for counting the number of winning of game balls to the first special winning opening 36B. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the first large winning opening second count switch 360B, the payout device 83 sets the predetermined number of game balls as the winning ball through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. Dispense to plate 17 or lower plate 18. In the present embodiment, the first special winning opening first count switch 360A and the first special winning opening second count switch 360B are appropriately referred to as a first special winning opening count switch 360.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second special winning opening count switch 370 disposed behind the second special winning opening 37A. The second winning port count switch 370 is for counting the number of winning of the game balls to the second winning port 37A. When a winning of a game ball is detected by the second winning port count switch 370, the payout device 83 sets the predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 or the upper plate 17 or the lower plate. Dispense to plate 18.

  The first special winning opening first count switch 360A, the first special winning opening second count switch 360B, and the second special winning opening count switch 370 include a first special winning opening 36A, a first special winning opening 36B, and When a game ball passes through the second winning port 37A, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

  The specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B arranged in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are connected to the main control circuit 60. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 assuming that a V prize has been won when it is detected that a game ball has passed through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 assuming that a non-V winning has occurred when detecting that a game ball has passed through the non-specific area 38B in the big hit game state.

The main control circuit 60 is configured to open and close the first special winning opening 36A. The first special winning opening first shutter solenoid 3610A that drives the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening and closing the first special winning opening 36B. The first big winning opening second shutter solenoid 3610B that drives the mouth shutter 361B and the second big winning opening shutter solenoid 3710 that drives the second big winning opening shutter 371A that opens and closes the second big winning opening 37A are exclusive. To control.
Thus, for example, the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B are in an open state in which game balls can enter the first special winning opening 36A and the first special winning opening 36B, Is driven to change to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win, and in a situation where the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B are at least in the closed state, the second large winning opening shutter 371A is The game ball is driven so as to change to an open state in which a game ball can be awarded to the second large winning opening 37A and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be awarded or difficult. The second special winning opening shutter 371A is driven so as to change between an open state in which game balls can enter the second special winning opening 37A and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win game balls. In a situation where the two-prize-winning opening 37A is at least in the closed state, the first large-prize-opening shutter 361A and the first large-prize-winning shutter 361B allow the game balls to enter the first large-winning opening 36A and the first large-winning opening 36B. It is driven so as to change between an open state in which a prize can be won and a closed state in which a prize of a game ball is impossible or difficult.
The first special winning opening 36A, the first special winning opening 36B, and the second special winning opening 37A are formed by the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the first special winning opening shutter 361B, and the second special winning opening shutter 371A. The opening drive is performed when the special symbol has a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54 and is shifted to the big hit game state.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. Thereby, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined symbol display mode in the predetermined symbol display section 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and a game ball enters the second starting port 33. It becomes easy.

  For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the gaming state other than the time saving gaming state (“non-probable change / non-time saving gaming state” in the present embodiment) is 10/257, and the wing member 34 Is lower than in the high probability state (time saving game state). On the other hand, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the high probability state is, for example, 257/257, and when this is won, the blade member 34 is opened three times for 1.3 seconds. In addition, the number of the ordinary symbols that become the winning symbols in the ordinary symbol game is one, and the winning count number that becomes the upper limit when the second starting port 33 is opened is 10 (10).

  The main control circuit 60 controls a displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific area 38A. Accordingly, when a round game, which will be described later, is being executed in the big hit game state, the displacement member 39 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is in the closed state even in the big hit game state, the game ball cannot pass or become difficult to pass through the specific area 38A, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  When the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displaying the first special symbol display unit 55, the first special symbol display unit 55 displays the first special symbol display unit 55. Until the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is displayed. The number of times the execution (start) of the special symbol change display is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been variably displayed, is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol held as the number of holdings related to the first special symbol is started.

  When the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displaying, the second special symbol holding display unit 56 displays the second special symbol when the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 330. Until the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed on the 1 special symbol display section 53 or the 2nd special symbol display section 54, the second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is performed. The number of times the execution (start) of the special symbol change display is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the second special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held as the number of holds for the second special symbol is started.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority order of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set such that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the winning order of the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 may be displayed in a variable order in the winning order.

  In addition, the upper limit is set as described above for the number of suspensions for which the execution of the special symbol change display is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 sets the first startup port 32 and the second startup port 33 to each other. When a game ball is won and a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the number of change display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four at a maximum. (That is, 4 detection times), and the fifth and subsequent numbers are not stored as the reserved number. At this time, when the number of reservations is reduced by the end of the special symbol change display, the number of reservations is added again with the upper limit of four.

  When the number of reserved first special symbol games in the first special symbol display unit 53 is, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the first RAM in the main RAM 63. One special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start memory, and thereafter, information on the special symbol game for which the number of reserves is four is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. It is sequentially stored as a start memory.

  Similarly, in the case of the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the holding number of the second special symbol game is held to, for example, four, the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54 The information of the second special symbol game is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63 as the start memory. 2 The symbols are sequentially stored in the special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) as start memories.

  Therefore, the maximum number of game balls pertaining to the special symbol game accompanying the winning in the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 is a maximum of eight in total, and the first special symbol reservation display section 54 and the second special symbol are provided. The number of suspension displays by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the suspension display unit 55 is also four.

  The open state of the first special winning opening 36A and the first special winning opening 36B by the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B is determined by the first special winning opening count switch 360 (the first special winning opening first). The count value (the number of winning prizes of the game balls) by the count switch 360A and the first winning port second counting switch 360B) becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10 winning numbers) or a predetermined opening time described later. It is maintained until one of the conditions, such as elapse, is satisfied. When the winning number of the game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first special winning opening 36A and the first special winning opening 36B has elapsed, the first special winning opening shutter 361A is set to the first special winning opening 36A. Is closed, and the first special winning opening shutter 361B is driven to close the first special winning opening 36B.

  In the open state of the second special winning opening 37A by the second special winning opening shutter 371A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the second special winning opening count switch 370 becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10 winning numbers). , Or until one of the following conditions is satisfied: When the winning number of the game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second special winning opening 37A has elapsed, the second special winning opening shutter 371A is driven to close the second special winning opening 37A. You.

  In the big hit gaming state, the first big winning opening 36 (the first big winning opening 36A and the first big winning opening 36B) and the second big winning opening are based on a predetermined big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. The open state and the closed state of 37A are repeated. In the big hit gaming state, a game in which each of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37A is in an open state and a closed state for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on a winning hole opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. Is called a “round game (round game)”. A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37A is closed by one round game, the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37A is opened as the next round game. The state up to is also referred to as “inter-round game”, “inter-round interval”, or simply “interval”. In one round game, each of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37A may be opened and closed multiple times. Further, in one round game, the open / close state of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37A is exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning opening is continuously closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a so-called small hitting game state is provided as a gaming state having characteristics different from the big hitting gaming state. The small hitting game state is not defined by the concept of the round game unlike the big hitting game state. In the small hitting game state of the present embodiment, the first big winning opening 36 is opened twice or three times. Stipulated. Of course, in the small hitting game state, control may be performed such that an arbitrary or specific large winning opening is opened only once or repeatedly opened a plurality of times.
The small hitting game state is a gaming state in which the game shifts to a small hit winning by a special symbol lottery. The game state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small hitting game state. For example, in the non-probable variable game state, when a small hit is won and the game is shifted to the small hit game state, the game state after the end of the small hit game state remains the non-probable variable game state before the shift to the small hit game state. Therefore, there is no transition to the probable change game state. Similarly, when a small hit is won in the probability change game state and the game is shifted to the small hit game state, the game state after the end of the small hit game state is changed to the small hit game state as long as the number of games in the probability change game state remains. , The game state remains unchanged before transitioning to the non-probable game state.

  Round games are counted as the number of rounds (number of times), such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including drawings to be referred to in conjunction with the description), a “round” with a number such as one round or the first round is simply referred to as “R” such as 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc. In one round game, before the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37A is opened a predetermined number of times, the maximum winning number per round is reduced. When it reaches, the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37A are closed, and the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37A are not opened for the remaining number of times of opening. , The round game is ended.

  In a specific round game in which the first winning port 36 is opened in the big hit game state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. Thereby, the specific area 38A is in the open state and the closed state in the specific round game in the big hit game state. In other words, in a specific round game, a game ball may pass through the specific area 38A and win V, while in a round game other than the specific round game, a game ball may temporarily enter the first winning port 36A. Even if a prize is won, the game ball cannot pass or pass through the specific area 38A. That is, the types of the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) include a jackpot gaming state not including a specific round game and a jackpot gaming state including a specific round game.

  In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54 is displayed. For example, during the change display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 includes a numeral except for a specific case. Symbols (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”,.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  In the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54, if the special symbol that has been changed and stopped has a specific stop display mode, the player is made aware of the "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, in one of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is displayed in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, a "big hit" in which many balls can be obtained. When the stop display is performed, the combination of the effect decorative symbols displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is displayed in a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all the same symbols are arranged in each of the plurality of symbol rows). , And the effect image for the big hit is displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  For example, the main CPU 61 included in such a main control circuit 60 may provide a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first start area (the second start port 33). ) Functions as a specific game state shift determining means for determining whether to shift to or not.

  Further, for example, the main CPU 61 sets a condition that the specific game state shift determination unit obtains a determination result indicating that the specific game state is to be shifted, or a condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display unit in a specific mode. In addition, it functions as a game state control means for controlling the game state to a specific game state.

  In addition, for example, the main CPU 61 determines that the specific game state is to be shifted to the specific game state by the specific game state shift determining unit after the specific game state ends, on condition that the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the specific game state. Special game state control for controlling the special game state (probably changed game state) where the determination result is relatively easy to obtain, in other words, the special game state (probably changed game state) where the identification information is easily stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the display means. Functions as a means. It should be noted that the main CPU 61 can control the special game state until the number of times of changing the identification information by the display means reaches a predetermined number after the end of the specific game state.

  In addition, for example, in the specific game state, the main CPU 61 changes the first variable winning device (the second special winning opening shutter 371A) to the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state). The game functions as a first round game execution means (first advantageous game execution means) for executing the game a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61 functioning as the first round game execution means can perform control for changing the first variable winning device to the first mode and the second mode a plurality of times during execution of at least one round game. .

Further, for example, in the specific gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the second variable winning device (the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B) in the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state). ) Functions as a second round game executing means (second advantageous game executing means) for executing a round game (round game) which is varied a predetermined number of times.
In addition, for example, the main CPU 61 functioning as the second round game execution means performs the second round game in the first time (for example, 5.1 seconds) in which the second variable winning device is in the first state in total. While being prescribed, when the second variable winning device is in the first state, it is difficult for the variable member to enter the easy state for a total of the second time (for example, 0.1 second) in a round game. (E.g., the first round of the "hit pattern 3" described later) and the time during which the second variable winning device is in the first state are defined as the first time, and the second variable winning device is in the first state. , The easy-to-pass round game (for example, “hit pattern 2” described later) in which the variable member can enter the easy state for a third time (for example, 5.1 seconds) longer than the second time in total. 1R) and It is feasible.
Further, for example, as the second round game, the total time during which the second variable prize device is in the first state is defined as a first time (for example, 7.1 seconds), and the second variable prize device is in the second state. In the first state, a difficult-to-pass round game in which the variable member can easily be in the easy state for a total of the second time (for example, 0.1 second) (for example, the first round of “hit pattern 4” described later) ) And the second round game is defined as a third time (for example, 3.1 seconds) shorter than the first time in total for the second variable prize device to be in the first state. When the variable winning device is in the first state, the easy-to-pass round game in which the variable member can enter the easy state for a fourth time (for example, 3.1 seconds) longer than the second time in total (for example, 3.1 seconds) For example, 1R of “hit pattern 1” described later ) And, it is possible to run.

Here, the jackpot game state is, for example, a specific game state A in which the first round game execution means executes a predetermined number of first round games, and the second round game execution means executes only a difficult-to-pass round game a predetermined number of times. A specific game state B in which the first round game execution means executes a predetermined number of first round games, and the second round game execution means executes a predetermined number of second round games including a passable round game; Regardless of whether the special game state control means controls the special game state or not, the specific game state transition determination means has the same probability of being determined to shift, and whether the game medium has passed through the specific area Irrespective of whether the specific game state is not shifted to a disadvantageous game state after the end of the specific game state after the shift to the specific game state, It is realized a non-specific game state.
Further, in the specific game state B and the specific game state C, the displacement mode of the second variable winning device is the same or substantially the same.

  A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 for realizing the above-described units will be described later.

  The main ROM 62 stores a program for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes described below, including various functions of the main CPU 61, and various tables.

  The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flag, counter, timer, variable value, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable and writable storage medium can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

  The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

  The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

  The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub control circuit 70.

  The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 63 at the time of power failure.

  Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first winning port first shutter solenoid 3610A, a first winning port second shutter solenoid 3610B, a second winning port shutter solenoid 3710, a blade member solenoid 340, A displacement member solenoid 390 and an external terminal plate 80 are included.

  The external terminal board 80 is connected to an external device such as a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant or a function of displaying the number of big hits, or a hall computer 100 for managing a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall. For data communication.

  The various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first starting port switch 320, a second starting port switch 330, a passing gate switch 350, a first winning port first count switch 360A, and a first winning port. A two-count switch 360B, a second winning port count switch 370, a specific area switch 380A, a non-specific area switch 380B, a general winning port left switch 400A, a general winning port right switch 400B, and a backup clear switch 81 are included.

  The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and a later-described ejection / fire control circuit 82 in the event of a power failure or the like in response to an operation of a hall manager.

  The firing device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to the main control circuit 60 via the payout / fire control circuit 82.

  The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / firing control circuit 82. The payout / firing control circuit 82 mainly controls the firing device 26 and the payout device 83, and the firing device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected. In other words, the payout / firing control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 implement a game value providing means.

  The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting lending of a game ball in accordance with an operation of a player, and can transmit and receive signals to and from the ball lending operation panel 85. .

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and the lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. This causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game balls. The payout device 83, for example, pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning in the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33, and sets the number of prize balls per winning in the general winning port 40 as the number of prize balls. Ten game balls are paid out, and fifteen game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls per winning in the first winning port 36 or the second winning port 37A.

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 supplies power to a firing solenoid (not shown) when the firing handle 26b of the firing device 26 is gripped by the player and rotated in a clockwise direction, Control is performed to fire the game ball toward the game area 1p.

  The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes a timer interrupt process as an interrupt process even during the execution of a main process described later. The timer interrupt processing is executed with an interrupt condition generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) as a trigger.

  The sub-control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured so that a command is supplied from the main control circuit 60.

  The sub-control circuit 70 performs various controls in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. The sub-CPU 71, the program ROM 72, the work RAM 73, the command input port 74, the backup capacitor 75, the display control It has a circuit 76, an audio control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79. The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. The speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the audio control circuit 77. The lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to the movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to a push operation button switch 90A provided on the push operation button 9A, and is connected to a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B. The push operation button switch 90A detects an operation of the push operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies a rotation direction and a rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub control circuit 70 is supplied with a pressing operation signal from a pressing operation button switch 90A and a rotation operation signal from a jog dial switch 90B.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In other words, the sub CPU 71 implements a notification unit, an effect mode determination unit, and an effect mode control unit. The program ROM 72 and the work RAM 73 implement storage means. Note that the sub CPU 71 and the program ROM 72 function as display control means for controlling the display means (the liquid crystal display device 4).

  For example, when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in one specific game state (for example, “small hit 2”), the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the special game state after the end of the specific game state. Function as a notifying means capable of notifying whether or not the control is performed. In addition, for example, when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in one specific game state (for example, hitting “small hit 1”), the liquid crystal display device 4 performs a special operation after the end of one specific game state. Regardless of whether or not the game state is controlled, it functions as a notification unit that can perform notification in the same manner as the notification regarding the game state. Further, for example, the liquid crystal display device 4 allows the game medium to pass through a specific area in one specific game state (for example, "big hit of 5") and another specific game state (for example, one hit of "small hit 1"). In this case, it functions as a notifying unit that can notify that the game medium has passed through the specific area.

The sub-CPU 71 is, for example, an effect mode determining unit that can determine any effect mode from a plurality of effect modes including the first effect mode (normal mode, first time-saving mode, second time-saving mode, probability change mode). Function as In addition, for example, the sub CPU 71 functions as an effect mode control unit that can control the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining unit.
For example, the effect mode determination means may allow the game medium to pass through the specific area during the second advantageous game (for example, opening the middle where V winning can be achieved) executed in one specific game state (for example, per "probable change 5"). It is possible to determine the first effect mode (for example, the probable change mode) on the condition that the user has performed.
Also, for example, the effect mode determining means may determine that the game medium does not pass through the specific area during the second advantageous game executed in one specific game state (for example, "small hit 1"). It is possible to determine an effect mode (for example, the first time-saving mode) different from the one effect mode (for example, the probability change mode).
Also, for example, when the effect mode determining means is controlled to the first effect mode (for example, the probable change mode), the first effect mode is determined on condition that the special game state (for example, the probable change game state) ends. A different production mode can be determined.
Further, for example, the effect mode determination means is configured to execute the special game after the end of one specific game state, when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in one specific game state (for example, “small hit 2”). When controlled to the special game state by the state control means, it is possible to determine the first effect mode (for example, the probability change mode).
Also, for example, when the effect mode control means is controlling to the first effect mode, one specific game state (for example, “hit 5”) or another specific game state (for example, “small hit 1”) ), And can be controlled to the first effect mode on condition that the game medium passes through the specific area during the second advantageous game executed in the specific game state in which the shift control is performed. .

  Specific examples of the control of the sub CPU 71 for realizing the above-described units will be described later.

  The program ROM 72 stores a program for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects and various tables.

  The work RAM 73 stores various data (flag, counter, timer, variable value, etc.) as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 71.

  The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

  The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by quickly supplying power to the work RAM 73 at the time of power failure.

  The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 71, and includes, for example, an image data processor (VDP) and various image data. It comprises an image data ROM in which data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and a D / A converter for converting image data as image signals. Note that the configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer according to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative design image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraudulent notification image data, and the like.

  Further, the display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an image is displayed based on an image signal from the D / A converter.

  The audio control circuit 77 is for controlling audio generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and includes, for example, a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an audio signal ROM, and the like. AMP is included. Note that the configuration of the audio control circuit 77 is also an example to the last, and is not limited to this.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and outputs one sound from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in accordance with a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Audio data can be selected.

  The sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c.

  The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp / LED 27 including a decorative lamp or the like, and includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM storing a plurality of types of lamp decorative patterns, and the like. It is composed of Note that the configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also an example, and is not limited thereto.

  The movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (oscillates) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by operating the press operation button 9A or the like during the valid period of the operation on the operation unit 9 in the big hit game state, for example. Etc.) may be controlled.

[Amusement machine specifications]
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, specifications regarding the gaming characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, the hit probability (big hit probability) of a special symbol including the small hit probability described later is 1/80 (25/2000) when the probability is low (non-probable changing game state). ), It is 1/25 (80/2000) at the time of high probability (probable change game state). The small hit probability of the small hit game state is 0 in the first special symbol and 1/25 (80/2000) in the second special symbol. The probabilities at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability in the jackpot probability are not limited to those described above. Probabilities that are more likely to be won at the time of high probability than at the time of low probability can be appropriately adopted. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. The first special symbol may also be won. In this case, the winning probability of the other special symbol may be higher or lower than that of the other special symbol, or may be the same.

As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is preferentially digested. Note that the order of digestion may be a winning order, or the first special symbol may be prioritized.
As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability change game state), the ST game state in which the probability change game state continues up to 70 times as the number of games (the number of times of the change of the special symbol) is mounted. Note that the number of STs is not limited to the above. Further, the probable change game state may be continued until the next big hit winning.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. In other words, in the first special symbol big hit symbol “probable change 1”, the special winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) is “hit pattern 1”, 16R is given as the number of rounds of the round game, and the bonus content is “first hit pattern”. Special design small probability big hit ". The probability (selection rate) of “probable change 1” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 20/100.

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol "probable change 2", it is "hit pattern 2", 8R is given as the number of rounds, and the bonus content is "first special symbol medium variable big hit". The selection rate of the big hit symbol “probable change 2” of the first special symbol is set to 40/100.

In the first special symbol big hit symbol "time reduction 1", it becomes "hit pattern 3", the number of rounds 8R is given, and the bonus content is "first special symbol middle time reduction big hit". The selection rate of the first special symbol big hit symbol "hour reduction 1" is set to 30/100.
In the first special symbol big hit symbol "hour reduction 2", it becomes "hit pattern 4", the number of rounds 16R is provided, and the bonus content is "first special symbol large time reduction jackpot". The selection rate of the first special symbol big hit symbol "hour reduction 2" is set to 10/100.

In the big hit symbol “probable change 3” of the second special symbol, the winning pattern is “hit pattern 5”, the number of rounds 14R is given, and the bonus content is “second special symbol big certain variable big hit”. The selection rate of the big hit symbol “probable change 3” of the second special symbol is set to 3/100.
In the big hit symbol "probable change 4" of the second special symbol, it is "hit pattern 6", the number of rounds 16R is awarded, and the bonus content is "second special symbol extra large probable variable hit". The selection rate of the big hit symbol “probable change 4” of the second special symbol is set to 2/100.
In the big hit symbol “probable change 5” of the second special symbol, it is “hit pattern 7”, the number of rounds 2R is given, and the bonus content is “second special symbol hit”. The selection rate of the big hit symbol “probable change 5” of the second special symbol is set to 95/100.

In the small hit symbol "small hit 1" of the second special symbol, "hit pattern 8" is obtained, and the bonus content is "second special symbol hit". The selection rate of the small hit symbol "small hit 1" of the second special symbol is set to 70/100.
In the small hit symbol "small hit 2" of the second special symbol, it is "hit pattern 9", and the bonus content is "second special symbol discrimination hit". The selection rate of the small hit symbol “small hit 2” of the second special symbol is set to 30/100.
It should be noted that the small hit game state does not have the concept of a round game unlike the big hit game state, and thus the number of rounds is not specified.
Note that the number of rounds is not limited to 2R, 8R, 14R, and 16R, and a jackpot of another round number may be provided. In addition, the types of jackpots are not limited to those described above. The types of big hits of the first special symbol may be increased, and the kinds of big hits of the second special symbol may be increased. The type of small hit is not limited to two types, but may be one type or three or more types.

The special winning opening count number is set so as to count up to 10 in each of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37A as an upper limit winning number per round. The count number (specified number / maximum winning number) of the large winning prize is “10”, but is not limited thereto.
As the time saving performance (specifications of the time saving game state), when the game shifts to the probable change game state after the end of the big hit game state, during the high probability (while in the probable change game state), the big hit of “probable change 1” to “probable change 5” Non-probable variable gaming state up to 70 times if the game does not shift to the probable variable gaming state after the end of the gaming state, or non-probable variable game state if the game does not transition to the probable variable gaming state after the end of the big hit game state of "hours reduction 1" and "hours reduction 2" , The time-saving game state is set to continue up to 30 times. It should be noted that the time saving performance may be more or less (including 0) than the number of probable game states.
The number of prize balls is three per winning in the starting opening (the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33), and 10 per winning in the general winning opening 40, and the large winning opening (first It is set so that there are 15 winnings per winning in the special winning opening 36A, the first special winning opening 36B, and the second special winning opening 37A). The number of prize balls is not limited to the above.
Ordinarily, the winning probability of a symbol is set to be 10/257 when the probability is low, and 257/257 when the probability is high. Normally, the number of hits per symbol is set to one. Note that the probabilities at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability are not limited to those described above. Probabilities that are more likely to be won at the time of high probability than at the time of low probability can be appropriately adopted. In addition, the winning may not be performed at a low probability. Further, the number of symbols per symbol is not limited to those described above. The number may be two or more. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that different open patterns are associated with each other.
The winning count when the second starting port 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as an upper limit. It should be noted that the second start port count number (prescribed number / upper winning number) may be other values.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of opening / closing patterns A to H are defined as an opening / closing pattern of one round (one round opening / closing pattern) for the first special winning opening 36. As shown in FIG. 10, a plurality of opening / closing patterns I to K are defined as one round opening / closing pattern for the second special winning opening 37A. The opening pattern of the special winning opening is not limited to the above 11 types. The number may be 10 or less, or 13 or more.
The opening / closing patterns A to F and I to K are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening / closing patterns G and H are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the small hit gaming state. The opening / closing patterns G and H in the small hitting game state are not defined as one round, but are shown together with other opening / closing patterns A to F and I to K for convenience. The first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37A are simply referred to as a special winning opening unless otherwise required. The opening / closing patterns A to K shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 are merely examples, and specific times for defining the opening / closing patterns may be other than those shown.

(Opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening)
The opening / closing pattern A is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 12 s, and then the open state is continued for 3 s. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. The round section is similarly defined as a period from the first open state to the final open state in the other opening / closing patterns B to H.
In the section where the open state is 0.1 s, the open state of the special winning opening is a short open state in which the open state is relatively short. In the section in which the open state is 3 s, the open state of the special winning opening is longer than the short open state, and the open state of the special winning opening is a middle open state shorter than the long open state. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, the middle opening occurs once after the closed state occurs once after the short opening occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 3.1 s.
It should be noted that in the open state in which the short opening is performed, it is extremely difficult to win the game ball in the large winning opening, and in the open state in which the middle opening is performed, the winning of the game ball in the large winning opening is easier than in the short opening. In the open state in which the long opening is performed, it is easier to win the game ball in the big winning opening than in the middle opening. For convenience of explanation, a section where the open state is 0.1 s or less is referred to as short open, a section where the open state is longer than 0.1 s and less than 28 s is referred to as middle open, and a section where the open state is 28 s or longer is referred to as long open.

  The opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 12 s, and then the open state is continued for 5 s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, after the short opening occurs once, the middle opening occurs once through the closing state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 5.1 s. Although the total open time is longer than the opening / closing pattern A, the total open time may be the same or shorter.

  The opening / closing pattern C is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 3 s, and then the open state is continued for 5 s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern C, after the short opening occurs once, the middle opening occurs once through the closing state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 5.1 s.

  The opening / closing pattern D is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 3 s, and then the open state is continued for 7 s again. That is, in the opening / closing pattern D, after the short opening occurs once, the middle opening occurs once through the closing state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern D is 7.1 s. Although the total opening time is longer than the opening / closing pattern C, it may be the same or shorter.

  The opening / closing pattern E is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state lasts only 0.1 s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern E, only one short-circuit opening occurs, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern E is 0.1 s. The number of times of opening the first special winning opening 36 may be two or more. Further, the opening time may be a time other than the above-described time.

  The opening / closing pattern F is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 11 s, and the open state is continued again for 1.6 s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern F, after the short opening occurs once, the middle opening occurs once through the closing state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern F is 1.7 s.

  The opening / closing pattern G is such that the opening state is initially 0.1 s, the closing state is 2 s, the opening state is 0.1 s again, the closing state is 11 s, and then the opening state continues for 1.6 s again. It is an opening and closing pattern. That is, in the opening / closing pattern G, one short-opening occurs, one closed opening occurs, one short-opening occurs, one short-opening occurs, and one middle opening occurs after one further closed state. , The total opening time of the opening / closing pattern G is 1.8 s. The number of times of opening the first special winning opening 36 may be set to two times or less or four times or more. The first winning port 36 is opened three times, but the opening time is not limited to the above. Any one or more of the open times may be shorter or longer than the open time described above. Further, the closing time of the first special winning opening 36 may be longer or shorter than the above-described time.

  The opening / closing pattern H is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.9 s, the closed state is 13 s, and then the open state is continued for 0.9 s again. That is, in the opening / closing pattern H, after the middle opening occurs once, the middle state opens once after passing through the closing state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern H is 1.8 s.

Note that the number of times of opening and closing patterns A to D and F may be one or three or more. In addition, in each of the opening and closing patterns, the first special winning opening 36 is opened twice, but the opening time is not limited to the above. Either or both of the open times may be shorter or longer than the open time described above. Further, the closing time may be longer or shorter than the above-described time.
In the present embodiment, both the open / close plates (the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B) are always opened or closed, but only one of them is opened. You may.

(Opening / closing pattern of the second big winning opening)
The opening / closing pattern I is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state lasts for 1 s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern I, the middle opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern I is 1 s.

  The open / close pattern J is an open / close pattern in which the open state lasts for 10 seconds. That is, in the opening / closing pattern J, the middle opening only occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern J is 10 s. Although the total opening time is longer than the opening / closing pattern I, the total opening time may be the same or shorter.

  The opening / closing pattern K is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state lasts for 28 s. That is, the opening / closing pattern K is such that the long opening only occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern K is 28 s. Although the total open time is longer than the open / close patterns I and J, it may be the same or shorter for one or both.

Regarding the opening and closing patterns I to K, the number of times of opening the second special winning opening 37A may be two or more. Further, the opening time of the second special winning opening 37A may be set to a time other than the above-described time.
Further, in the present embodiment, one opening / closing plate (second big winning opening shutter 371A) is provided, but two or more opening / closing plates may be provided. In this case, all or only a part may be opened.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, an operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific area 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

  The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open / close state of the first big winning opening 36 regardless of the big hitting game state and the small hitting game state. As shown in FIG. 11, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern) is, as a rule, after the operation period in which the specific area 38A is opened is 0.1 s first, and then the specific area 38A is closed. There is a non-operation period of 2 s, an operation period of 0.1 s followed by an open period, a 9 s non-operation period of closing the specific area 38 </ b> A, and an operation period of 8 s again thereafter. It is defined as a pattern. The total operation time of the displacement member operation pattern is 8.2 s. In the operation period of 0.1 s, since the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively short, it is extremely difficult to win a V in the specific area 38A. On the other hand, during the operation period of 8 s at the maximum, the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively long, so that the V prize in the specific area 38A is relatively easy. In the operation period of 8 s, in one round in which the first special winning opening 36 is opened and closed, the first special winning opening 36 is closed, for example, when the large winning opening count reaches the upper limit winning number, When a predetermined monitoring processing time (for example, 1098 ms) for the remaining sphere described below has passed, the displacement member 39 becomes inactive and the specific area 38A is closed even before the predetermined 8 s has elapsed. There is.

Regarding the opening pattern of the displacement member 39, a different pattern may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. For example, a pattern in which the second special winning opening 37A is always open during opening or a pattern in which opening and closing are always repeated at regular intervals (for example, every two seconds) may be executed instead or increased.
When only one of the first special winning opening 36A and the first special winning opening 36B is opened, the opening and closing may be performed according to the above-described pattern only when the first special winning opening shutter 361A is opened. .

[Grand Winner opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, a description will be given of the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 12, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 9 are defined as the special winning opening and closing patterns (winning patterns).
The "hit pattern 1" is a hit pattern that is generated at the time of the bonus "probable change big hit 1" and in which the number of rounds specified for the rounds that are generally open is defined as 16R.
In addition, the interval between rounds is a section in which the special winning opening is closed after the special winning opening is finally closed in one round until the first winning opening is opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as the pattern of the interval between rounds, an interval pattern a in which the closed time (closed time) is 1.3 s and an interval pattern b in which the closed time is 2 s are defined. .
In the “hit pattern 1”, the intervals between all rounds are the interval patterns a, the first special winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in each of the 1R and 2Rs, and the 3rd to 16Rs have the opening pattern A in all. It is defined that the two major winning openings 37A have the opening and closing pattern I. It is to be noted that both the first and the second R can win the first large winning opening 36, and are executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is possible (FIG. 13A).

  The “hit pattern 2” is a hit pattern that is generated when the bonus “probable change big hit 2” is set and the specified number of rounds is specified as 8R. In the “hit pattern 2”, the intervals between all rounds are the interval patterns a, the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in each of the 1R and 2Rs, and the second large winning opening 36 becomes the second large winning opening in the 3R to 8R. The winning opening 37A is defined so as to have the opening / closing pattern J. It is to be noted that both the 1R and the 2R can be awarded to the first special winning opening 36, and are executed as a round in which a V award can be made to the specific area 38A (FIG. 14A).

  The “hit pattern 3” is generated when the bonus “time saving big hit 1” is generated, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is specified as 8R. In the “hit pattern 3”, all the intervals between rounds are the interval patterns a, the first special winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern C in both the 1R and 2R, and the 3rd to 8R in all It is defined that the second big winning opening 37A has the opening / closing pattern J. It is to be noted that both the 1R and 2R can win the first large winning opening 36, but are executed as a round in which it is impossible or difficult to win the V in the specific area 38A (FIG. 14B). .

  The “hit pattern 4” is generated when the bonus “time saving big hit 2” is set, and is a hit pattern in which the specified round number is specified as 16R. In the “hit pattern 4”, all round-to-round intervals are interval patterns “a”, the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern D in each of the 1R and 2R, and the second large winning opening 36 becomes the second large winning opening in the 3R to 8R. The winning opening 37A is defined to be the opening / closing pattern J, and the second large winning opening 37A is defined to be the opening / closing pattern K at the ninth to 16th eyes. It is to be noted that, although both the 1R and 2R can win the first large winning opening 36, it is executed as a round in which it is impossible or difficult to win the V in the specific area 38A (FIG. 13B). .

  The “hit pattern 5” is generated when the bonus “probable change big hit 3” is generated, and is a hit pattern in which the specified round number is specified as 14R. In the “hit pattern 5”, the intervals between all rounds are the interval patterns “a”, the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in each of the 1R and 2R, and the second large winning opening 36 becomes the second large winning opening in the 3R to 14R. The winning opening 37A is defined so as to have the opening / closing pattern K. Note that the first and second rounds are executed as a round similar to the “hit pattern 2”.

  The “hit pattern 6” is a hit pattern that is generated when the bonus “probable change big hit 4” is specified and the specified number of rounds is 16R. In the “hit pattern 6”, the intervals between all rounds are the interval patterns a, the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in each of the 1R and 2R, and the second large winning opening 36 becomes the second large winning opening in the 3R to 16R. The winning opening 37A is defined so as to have the opening / closing pattern K. Note that the first and second rounds are executed as a round similar to the “hit pattern 2”.

  The “hit pattern 7” is a hit pattern generated when the bonus “probable change big hit 5” is set and the specified number of rounds is specified as 2R. The "winning pattern 7" has one interval between rounds and is an interval pattern b. The first special winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern E in the 1R, and the first special winning opening 36 opens and closes in the 2R. It is defined to be a pattern F. Note that the first R is executed as a round in which it is impossible or difficult to win the V in the specific area 38A according to the opening / closing pattern E, and the second R is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is possible according to the opening / closing pattern F. (FIG. 15A).

  The "winning pattern 8" is generated at the time of the bonus "small hit 1", and is defined so that the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern G only once. That is, in the “hit pattern 8”, the game ball may win the first big winning opening 36, and there may be a V winning in the specific area 38A (FIG. 15B). Even if there is a V prize to 38A, it is executed as it cannot be shifted to the probable change game state.

  The “hit pattern 9” is generated when the bonus “small hit 2” is generated, and is defined such that the first large winning opening 36 is in the open / close pattern H (FIG. 9) only once. That is, in the “hit pattern 9”, there is a possibility that a game ball wins in the first big winning opening 36 and there is a V winning in the specific area 38A, but there is a V winning in the specific area 38A. Even if it does, it is executed as it cannot be shifted to the probable change game state.

Although the opening / closing pattern is previously associated with each round in each hit pattern, an opening / closing pattern other than the above may be associated. For example, the first R pattern in the “hit pattern 1” may be the opening / closing pattern B instead of the opening / closing pattern A.
Also, the interval pattern may be one type or three or more types. Further, the time of the interval patterns a and b may be a time other than the above.
In addition, for the “winning pattern 1” to the “winning pattern 6”, the round in which the first big winning opening is opened may be only the first round, and the opening pattern of the second winning opening may be the opening pattern of the second big winning opening. For example, the 2R open pattern may be a 3R open pattern.
As for the “hit pattern 7”, the number of rounds may be one (the specified number of rounds is 1R), and the opening pattern of the first R may be the opening / closing pattern G. Thus, the “winning pattern 8” can be made the same as the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening and the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member 39. Therefore, from the opening / closing mode of the first special winning opening, “probable change 5” and “ Small hit 1 "cannot be determined at all.

[Operation of the first big winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 of the "hit pattern 1" corresponding to the bonus "probable change big hit 1" and the "hit pattern 4" corresponding to the bonus "time saving big hit 2"]
Next, the operation timings of the first special winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 in the "hit pattern 1" and the "hit pattern 4" will be described with reference to FIG. The description will focus on the first round, and the description of the other rounds will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 13A as an example, in the first round of the “hit pattern 1”, with the start of the open state of the first special winning opening 36, the displacement member is operated based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. By operating the 39, the specific area 38A enters an open state and a closed state in conjunction with opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36. More specifically, on the 1R, after the first special winning opening 36 is closed after the middle opening (open state is a section of 3 s), the first special winning opening 36 changes from the first special winning opening 36 to the first special winning opening. When a predetermined monitoring processing time for monitoring the remaining ball remaining in the ball passage up to the count switch 360 elapses, the displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, so that the specific area is controlled. 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. In other words, the specific area 38A becomes a closed state through an open state of about 5 seconds shorter than 8 seconds defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.
Note that, also in the second round of the “hit pattern 1”, the first special winning opening 36 and the specific area 38A are in the open state and the closed state similarly to the first round.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13B as an example, in the first round of the “hit pattern 4”, the start of the open state of the first special winning opening 36 is based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. By operating the displacement member 39, the specific area 38A is brought into an open state and a closed state in conjunction with opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36. More specifically, in the first round, when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first special winning opening 36 is closed after the middle opening (opening period is 7 s) is completed, the displacement member 39 is opened. Is forcibly controlled to maintain the non-operation state, so that the specific area 38A remains closed. That is, 1R ends in the specific area 38A without the 8s open state defined as the longest operation period defined by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.
In addition, also in the second R of the "hit pattern 4", the first special winning opening 36 and the specific area 38A are in the open state and the closed state as in the first R.

[Operation of the first big winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 of the "hit pattern 2" corresponding to the bonus "probable change big hit 2" and the "hit pattern 3" corresponding to the bonus "time saving big hit 1"]
Next, the operation timings of the first special winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 in the “hit pattern 2” and the “hit pattern 3” will be described with reference to FIG. The description will focus on the first round, and the description of the other rounds will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 14A as an example, in the first round of the “hit pattern 2”, with the start of the opening state of the first special winning opening 36, the displacement member is operated based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. By operating the 39, the specific area 38A enters an open state and a closed state in conjunction with opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36. More specifically, in the first round, when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first special winning opening 36 is closed by closing the middle opening (opening period of 5 s), the displacement member 39 is turned on. Is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, whereby the specific area 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. In other words, the specific area 38A becomes the closed state through an open state of about 7 seconds shorter than 8 seconds defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.
In addition, in the second round of the "hit pattern 2", the first special winning opening 36 and the specific area 38A are in the open state and the closed state as in the first round.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14B as an example, in the first round of the “hit pattern 3”, the opening state of the first special winning opening 36 is started, and based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. By operating the displacement member 39, the specific area 38A is brought into an open state and a closed state in conjunction with opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36. More specifically, in the first round, when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first special winning opening 36 is closed by closing the middle opening (opening period of 5 s), the displacement member 39 is turned on. Is forcibly controlled to maintain the non-operation state, so that the specific area 38A remains closed. That is, the first region ends in the specific region 38A without the 8s open state defined as the longest operation period defined by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.
In addition, in the second round of the "hit pattern 3", the first special winning opening 36 and the specific area 38A are in the open state and the closed state as in the first round.

[Operation of the first big winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 of the "hit pattern 7" corresponding to the bonus "probable change big hit 5" and the "hit pattern 8" corresponding to the bonus "small hit 1"]
Next, the operation timings of the first special winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 in the “hit pattern 7” and the “hit pattern 8” will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15 (a) as an example, in the first round of the "hit pattern 7", with the start of the open state of the first special winning opening 36, the displacement member is operated based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. By operating the 39, the specific area 38A enters an open state and a closed state in conjunction with opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36. More specifically, in the 1R, when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first special winning opening 36 is closed after the short open (the open state is in a section of 0.1 s) ends, the displacement is changed. Since the member 39 is forcibly controlled to maintain the inoperative state, the specific area 38A remains closed. That is, the first region ends in the specific region 38A without the 8s open state defined as the longest operation period defined by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.
When the first round ends, the second round starts after a lapse of 2 s between rounds. Also at the 2R, the displacement member 39 is operated based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. 11 with the start of the open state of the first special winning opening 36, which is linked to the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36. Thus, the specific area 38A is in the open state and the closed state.
In the 2R, when the first special winning opening 36 ends the middle opening (the opening state is in the section of 1.6 s) and becomes closed (the end of the round section), when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses. The displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the specific area 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is closed through an open state of about 2.6 s which is shorter than 8 s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15B as an example, in the “hit pattern 8”, the displacement member 39 is set based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. Is activated, the specific area 38A enters an open state and a closed state in conjunction with opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36. More specifically, when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first special winning opening 36 is closed after the middle opening (opening period is 1.6 s) ends, the displacement member 39 is forced. The specific region 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state by being controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state. In other words, the specific area 38A is closed through an open state of about 4.6 s which is shorter than 8 s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing pattern is the same as the “hit pattern 7” (open / close pattern E + interval pattern b + open / close pattern F) and the “hit pattern 8” (pattern G). However, the opening / closing patterns need not be exactly the same, and may be substantially the same. For example, in the relationship between the “hit pattern 7” and the “hit pattern 8”, the opening time and / or the closing time may be configured to be within an error of 0.3 second or less.

[Gaming state of game machine and effect mode]
Next, the gaming state and the effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the game state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a normal mode, a first time-saving mode, a second time-saving mode, and a probable change mode are implemented as effect modes in the normal gaming state.
The pachinko gaming machine stays in any of the effect modes by changing at least a part of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, a sound output from the speakers 10a to 10c, and a light emission mode of the lamp / LED 27. It has a configuration for performing a notification that allows the user to recognize whether or not the user is performing, so that effects that give different impressions in each effect mode can be executed.
The normal mode is an effect mode in a non-probable change / non-time saving game state. In the normal mode, an effect different from any one of the first time-saving mode, the second time-saving mode, and the probability change mode is performed.

  In the normal mode, a big hit based on the first special symbol is achieved, and after the big hit is completed, the mode is shifted from the normal mode to the first time-saving mode or the probability change mode. More specifically, when a V prize is won during a big hit, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the probable change mode. When a win is made, the mode shifts to the probable change mode. Move to If no V prize is won during the big hit, the mode shifts to the first time reduction mode.

The first time-saving mode is an effect mode in the probability-change game state or the non-probability-variation game state and the time-saving game state. The first time-saving mode is an effect mode in which the effect of the time-saving mode is a relatively small number of games (the number of times the special symbol changes, that is, the number of games of the special symbol game).
In the first time-saving mode, a hit based on the second special symbol ("probable change big hit 3" or "probable change big hit 4") is made, and after the hit ends, the first time-saving mode is continued, or the first time-saving mode is changed. Transition to mode. More specifically, the first time-saving mode is continued when no V winning is achieved during the hit, and the mode is shifted to the probable change mode when the V winning is achieved during the winning.
In the first time saving mode, a hit based on the second special symbol ("small hit 2") is reached, and after the hit is completed, the first time saving mode is continued or the first time saving mode is shifted to the positive change mode. More specifically, if the player wins a V during the hit, or does not win the V during the hit, and if the end of the hit is not in the probable change game state, the first time-saving mode is continued. On the other hand, if no V prize has been won during the hit, and if the end of the hit is in the probable change game state, the mode is shifted to the probable change mode.
In the first time-saving mode, a hit based on the second special symbol ("probable big hit 5" or "small hit 1") is made, and after the hit is completed, the first time-saving mode is continued, or the first time-saving mode is changed to the first time-saving mode. Shift to 2 hours mode. More specifically, if a V prize is not won during a hit, the mode shifts to the first time reduction mode. If the player wins a V during the hit and is not in the probable change game state after the end of the hit, the mode shifts to the second time reduction mode.
When the time-saving game state ends, the mode shifts from the first time-saving mode to the normal mode. In addition, in S466 described later, the mode may be promoted from the first time-saving mode to the second time-saving mode.

The second time-saving mode is an effect mode in the probability-changing gaming state or the non-probable-variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. The second time-saving mode is an effect mode that gives an impression that the number of games in the time-saving mode is relatively large.
In the second time-saving mode, the hit is based on the second special symbol, and after the hit is completed, the effect mode is continued or shifted similarly to the first time-saving mode.
When the time-saving game state ends, the mode shifts from the second time-saving mode to the normal mode. Further, in S466 described later, the mode may be promoted from the second time-saving mode to the probable change mode.

The probability change mode is an effect mode in the probability change game state and the time saving game state. The probability change mode is an effect mode indicating that the probability change game state is determined.
In the probable change mode, the hit is based on the second special symbol, and after the hit is completed, basically, the effect mode continues or shifts, similarly to the first time saving mode. However, in the probable change mode, a win based on the second special symbol ("probable big hit 5" or "small hit 1") is made. It will be.
When the time-saving game state (probable change game state) ends, the mode is shifted from the probable change mode to the normal mode.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, the processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 17, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. If this process ends, the process moves to S11.

  In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  In S12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a power failure detection state is present. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is detected, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power failure has not been detected, and the process proceeds to S13. Move.

  In S13, the main CPU 61 performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S14.

  In S14, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  In S15, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 7) is ON. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S30 (see FIG. 18) when determining that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, and proceeds to S16 when determining that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON. Transfer processing.

  In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a power failure detection flag, the process proceeds to S17; otherwise, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S30 (see FIG. 18). .

  In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a damage check of the work area and performs a process of calculating a work damage check value. If this process ends, the process moves to S18.

  In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S19, and when it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value, shifts the process to S30. .

  In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S20.

  In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of a work area at the time of power recovery. If this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  In S21, the main CPU 61 performs a probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 performs a display for notifying that the jackpot winning probability is a high probability state in the probability changing game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S22. In addition, the display to notify may be configured to end at the first change start or the end of change after the power is turned on.

  In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a power recovery command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power failure to the sub control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S24 to return to the address before the power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 8000H to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  In S32, the main CPU 61 performs an all work area clearing process. If this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S34, the main CPU 61 performs a process of initializing a work area when initializing the RAM. If this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S35, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for initializing the main RAM 63 to the sub control circuit 70. In the sub-control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 performs initialization based on the received command. If this process ends, the process moves to S36.

  In S36, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for inhibiting the interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  In S38, the main CPU 61 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this processing, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63, and if the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, shifts the processing to S42, where the system timer monitoring timer value becomes 3 If not, the process proceeds to S37.

  In S42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  In S43, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 measures a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub-control circuit 70, and measures an opening time of a special winning opening to be opened when a big hit or a small hit occurs. A special winning opening time timer, a security signal output timer for measuring a minimum output period of a security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when an illegal action is detected, and the like. And a process for updating various timers. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random value and a hit symbol determination random value in accordance with the detection signals from the first startup port switch 320 and the second startup port switch 330, and stores the big hit determination stored in the main ROM 62. With reference to a table (not shown), it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (a lottery or a small lottery) has been won, and a process of storing the result of the determination in the main RAM 63 is performed. The special symbol control process in S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  In S45, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a normal symbol determination random value and a normal symbol determination random value in accordance with a detection signal from the passing gate switch 350 and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random value and the extracted main symbol ROM in the main ROM 62. A normal symbol lottery table (not shown) is used to determine whether or not a normal symbol lottery has been won. The result of this determination, a normal symbol determination random number, and a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62 are determined. (Not shown), a determination is made as to which of a lost symbol and a hit symbol, and a process of storing the result of the determination is performed. In addition, when a normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination showing the hit symbol is stored, and in the case of a non-winning, the result of the determination showing the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the hit symbol is stored, the blade member 34 opens, for example, three times in 1.3 seconds, four times in 1.4 seconds, or six times in 1.8 seconds. . That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the blade member 34 is opened, and when the blade member 34 is in an open state, a game ball can easily enter the second starting port 33. If this process ends, the process moves to S46.

  In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 4 to the main RAM 63 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the ordinary symbol control process. Is performed. The main CPU 61 transmits a control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal in a variable display and a stop display. Further, the ordinary symbol display section 51 of the LED unit 5 displays the ordinary symbols in a variable display and a stop display based on the received control signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S47.

  In S47, the main CPU 61 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of generating data relating to a game information signal to be transmitted to the stand computer or the hall computer 100 and storing the data in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S48.

  In S48, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol reserved number data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the first starting port switch 320 or the second starting port switch 320 is detected in the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S91, S92 in FIG. 21) in the timer interrupt process described later. Based on the detection signal from the starting port switch 330 and the passage gate switch 350, and the update result of the reserved number data stored in the main RAM 63, which is updated according to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, A process of storing a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display section 55, the second special symbol hold display section 56, and the normal symbol hold display section 52 in the main RAM 63 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S49.

  In S49, the main CPU 61 performs a port output process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above steps and the like. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and an LED power supply (common signal) for turning on the LED, a first winning port shutter 361A, and a first winning event. A solenoid power supply for driving a solenoid for opening and closing the mouth shutter 361B and the second winning opening shutter 371A and opening and closing the blade member 34 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S50.

  In S50, the main CPU 61 performs a winning opening related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning port related command. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by main CPU 61]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt processing is executed in the following steps. The main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. This timer interrupt process is a process performed in response to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt processing.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. If this process ends, the process moves to S61.

  In S61, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by +1. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (such as a special symbol control process) on the condition that the predetermined number of times (three times) of the timer interrupt process is started. The timer update process in S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  In S62, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. Note that when a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 has been cleared, the main CPU 61 And a system reset signal is output. When a system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters a system reset state. If this process ends, the process moves to S63.

  In S63, the main CPU 61 performs a random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating a random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a hit determination random number counter, a hit symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. In addition, the random number counter for hit determination and the random number counter for winning symbol determination are unfair if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite, so that a fixed timing every 2 ms is used to secure these. Updates are done with. If this process ends, the process moves to S64.

  In S64, the main CPU 61 performs a switch input process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each of the winning areas has detected a winning. For example, when a winning is detected, the main CPU 61 sets a bit corresponding to a winning area determined to have a winning to “1 (ON)”. The switch input processing of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S65.

  In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that a game ball has won the first winning opening 36A, the first winning opening 36B, the second winning opening 37A, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40. A check is made to see if a prize has been won, and a payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout / firing control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out the prize ball corresponding to the winning area whose bit is “1 (ON)” from the payout device 83 in accordance with the winning of the game ball, and sets the set command. Is transmitted to the payout / firing control circuit 82. When this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area that triggered the command set is controlled to “0 (OFF)”. If this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  In S66, the main CPU 61 performs a command transmission control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. If this process ends, the process moves to S67.

  In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process ends, the timer interrupt process routine ends.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer updating process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 20, in S70, the main CPU 61 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of executions (startups) of the timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, when the number of executions (startups) of the timer interrupt process reaches a predetermined condition (three times), a predetermined process (a special symbol control process or the like) is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S71.

  In S71, the main CPU 61 decrements the value of the waiting time timer by one. The waiting time timer is a timer for measuring various execution waiting times. If this process ends, the process moves to S72.

  In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining sphere monitoring timer is “0”. The remaining ball monitoring timer is a ball passage from the first big winning opening 36A to the first big winning opening first count switch 360A, and a ball passage from the first big winning opening 36B to the first big winning opening second count switch 360B. Is a timer for measuring the remaining ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the remaining ball remaining in the ball passage from the second large winning opening 37A to the second large winning opening count switch 370. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is not “0”, , S73. In addition, when the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is “0” and the round game is not being performed, if the special winning opening count switch detects a game ball, an error may be notified.

  In S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining sphere monitoring timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S74.

  In S74, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining sphere monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is “0”, , S75.

  In S75, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area 38A is being opened. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the specific area 38A is not being opened, the process proceeds to S77, and when it determines that the specific area 38A is being opened, the process proceeds to S76.

  In S76, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting specific area closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data for closing the specific area 38A, and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on a control signal based on this data. As a result, the displacement member 39 is driven so that the specific area 38A is closed. If this process ends, the process moves to S77.

  In S77, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for measuring the discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharged balls that have been won in the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S80, and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not “0”, proceeds to S78. Transfer processing to In the present embodiment, a smaller value (short time) is set in the remaining sphere monitoring timer than in the discharge monitoring timer, but may be the same or a larger value (long time).

  In S78, the main CPU 61 decrements the value of the discharge monitoring timer by one. If this process ends, the process moves to S79.

  In S79, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the timer update processing routine, and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. Moves the process to S80.

  In S80, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the special winning opening counter is “1” or “2”. The special winning opening counter is a counter used to identify the first or second opening of the first special winning opening 36. Therefore, the value of the special winning opening counter is not a count of the number of times the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37A are actually opened, but is incremented by one for each round. is there. In this processing, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening counter is neither “1” nor “2”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S82 and sets the value of the special winning opening counter. If it is determined to be “1” or “2”, the process proceeds to S81.

  In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a control status flag described later is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening processing, the timer update processing routine ends, and the control state flag indicates the special winning opening processing. If it is determined that the value is not the value (04H), the process proceeds to S82.

  In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first special winning opening winning counter is greater than the value of the discharge ball counter. The first special winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the first special winning opening 36 detected by the first special winning opening count switch 360. The ejected ball counter is a counter for counting the number of ejected balls of game balls detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the first special winning opening winning counter becomes equal to the value of the discharge ball counter. In this process, if the value of the first special winning opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends the timer updating processing routine, and the value of the first special winning opening winning counter becomes If it is larger than the value of the ejection ball counter, the process proceeds to S83. The value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from when the game ball is detected by the first special winning opening count switch 360 to when it is detected by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. Equivalent to time. Therefore, if it is determined in this processing that the value of the first big winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the ball is clogged in the first big winning opening 36 or the first big winning due to a so-called goto action. It is assumed that only the winning opening count switch 360 is detected.

  In S83, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The ejection error command is equivalent to a command for notifying that ejection has not been performed normally. This discharge error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S84.

  In S84, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the first winning port winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the ejection error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process ends, the timer update process routine ends. The ejection error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a switch input process executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input processing is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 21, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs a fraud detection switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) that can detect radio waves, a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetism, a vibration sensor that can detect vibration, and the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S91. Note that if any of the above-described sensors is in the detection state, an error notification may be given, and at that time, even if the special winning opening count switch detects the winning of the game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may make it do.

  In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol related switch check process. This special symbol related switch check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S92.

  In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not an input of the passage gate switch 350 has been made, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected. 4), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit, this process ends. If it is determined that it is not the upper limit, a random number value for hit determination is extracted from the random number counter for hit determination of the normal symbol game, and a random number value for hit symbol determination is extracted from the random number counter for hit symbol determination. A process of storing in the symbol storage area is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S93.

  In S93, the main CPU 61 performs a prize ball related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting opening switch 320, and the second starting opening switch 330 have been input. If it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B has been input, a process of adding one to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter is performed, and the first starting opening switch 320 or the second When it is determined that the starter switch 330 has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the corresponding starter winning counter is performed. When this process ends, the switch input process routine ends.

[Special design related switch check processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol related switch check processing is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 22, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs a first startup port switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S101.

  In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a second startup port switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S102.

  In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a first special winning opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S103.

  In S103, the main CPU 61 performs a second winning port switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is ended, the special symbol related switch check processing routine is ended.

[First start-up switch check processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a first starting port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This first start-up switch check processing is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 23, in S110, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected based on a detection signal from the first starting port switch 320. Do. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start-up winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start-up switch 320 is “1 (ON)”. If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process proceeds to S111, and if the bit of the first starting port winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the first starting port is detected. The switch check processing routine ends.

  In S111, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is four or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is four or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is four or more, the first start-up switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of reservations is not four or more, the process proceeds to S112.

  In S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserved special first symbols stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S113.

  In S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a random number for hit determination of the special symbol game from the random number counter for hit determination by a so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a random number for hit symbol determination from the random number counter for hit symbol determination. Then, a process of extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area includes a first special symbol start storage area (0) to a first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the random number for hit determination performed is derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various types of information obtained by a game ball winning in the first opening 32 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start memory. If this process ends, the process moves to S114.

  In S114, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol fluctuation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol fluctuation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S115.

  In S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S116.

  In S116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command includes information indicating a random number for hit determination and information indicating a random number for winning symbol determination. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that a game ball has been won and whether or not the winning lottery result has been won. Become like The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect of changing a display mode of a reserved ball displayed in the effect when it is determined in the process of S115 that a winning effect is made. As a result, a so-called “look-ahead effect” in which an effect is executed based on the start memory before the execution of the fluctuation can be performed. When this process is completed, the first start-up switch check processing routine is completed.

[Second start-up switch check processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the second starting port switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. This second start-up switch check processing is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 24, in S120, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not winning of a game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected based on a detection signal from the second starting port switch 330. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start-up winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start-up switch 330 is “1 (ON)”. If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process proceeds to S121. If the bit of the second starting port winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the second starting port is detected. The switch check processing routine ends.

  In S121, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is four or more. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is four or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is four or more, the second startup port switch check processing routine is ended. If it is determined that the number of holds is not four or more, the process proceeds to S122.

  In S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the reserved number of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  In S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a random number for hit determination of the special symbol game from the random number counter for hit determination by a so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a random number for hit symbol determination from the random number counter for hit symbol determination. Then, a process of extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area includes a second special symbol start storage area (0) to a second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the random number for hit determination performed is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various types of information obtained by the game ball winning the second starting opening 33 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) as start memory. If this process ends, the process moves to S124.

  In S124, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol fluctuation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol change state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S125.

  In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S126.

  In S126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process is completed, the second startup port switch check processing routine is completed.

[First big win switch check process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first big winning opening switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. This first special winning opening switch check processing is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 25, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a winning of a game ball to the first special winning opening 36 is detected based on a detection signal from the first special winning opening count switch 360. Perform the following processing. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first special winning opening 36 has been detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S131 to detect the winning of the game ball to the first special winning opening 36. If it is determined that it is not performed, the process proceeds to S133.

  In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the first winning port winning counter. The first winning port winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum winning number per round has been reached. If this process ends, the process moves to S132.

  In S132, the main CPU 61 sets the first big winning port winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first special winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub-CPU 71 of the sub-controlling circuit 70, so that the sub-controlling circuit 70 determines that the game ball has won the first special winning opening 36. Become aware. With this, for example, the total payout number (payout prize ball number) displayed during the big hit is additionally displayed. If this process ends, the process moves to S133.

  In S133, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A has been detected based on the detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when determining that the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A has been detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S134 and determines that the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A has not been detected. In this case, the process proceeds to S142.

  In S134, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the ejection ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a specific area passage command. The specific area passing command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed (V prize) to the specific area 38A. The specific area passage command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the V winning in the specific area 38A. If this process ends, the process moves to S136.
It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the specific area passage command is not supplied to the sub CPU 71 when it is neither the first R nor the second R in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. Further, different types of specific area passing commands corresponding to the small hitting game state and the big hitting game state are provided, and the sub CPU 71 can identify which hit state is the passing to the specific area 38A. The configuration may be any.

  In S136, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the special winning opening counter is “1” or “2”. The special winning opening counter is the same as described above. In this processing, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening counter is neither "1" nor "2", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S142 and sets the value of the special winning opening counter to "1". If it is determined to be “1” or “2”, the process proceeds to S137.

  In S137, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a control state flag described later is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening process, the process moves to S140, and the control status flag indicates the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening process. ), The process proceeds to S138.

  In S138, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a control state flag to be described later is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening or a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. I do. When determining that the control status flag is “05H” or “06H”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S139, and determines that the control status flag is neither “05H” nor “06H”. Moves the process to S142.

  In S139, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S140, and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than “0”. Then, the process proceeds to S142. In this process, if it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not greater than “0”, it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred, and an error is notified by transmitting an error command to the sub control circuit 70. You may make it.

  In S140, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the specific area passage flag is “01H”. The specific area passage flag is an internal flag that is set to “01H” when the specific area switch 380A detects a V winning of a game ball. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area passage flag is “01H”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S142, and when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area passage flag is not “01H”, , S141.

  In S141, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the specific area passage flag. The value “01H” of the specific area passing flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the certain-variable game state is determined after the end of the big hit game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S142.

  In S142, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is determined based on the detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific region 38B is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S143, and determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific region 38B is not detected. In this case, the process proceeds to S144.

  In S143, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the ejection ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S144.

  In S144, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first winning port winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game ball is detected only in the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B without detecting the game ball by the first special winning opening count switch 360. judge. In this process, if the value of the first special winning opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends the first special winning opening switch check processing routine and the first large winning opening. If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S145.

  In S145, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The ejection error command is as described above. If this process ends, the process moves to S146.

  In S146, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the first winning port winning counter to the discharge ball counter. This prevents the ejection error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process is over, the first big winning opening switch check processing routine is finished. Note that the ejection error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S146.

[Second Grand Winner Switch Check Processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the second big winning opening switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. This second special winning opening switch check processing is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 26, in S150, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a winning of a game ball to the second special winning opening 37A is detected based on a detection signal from the second special winning opening count switch 370. Perform the following processing. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second special winning opening 37A is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S151 and detects the winning of the game ball to the second special winning opening 37A. If it is determined not to be performed, the second special winning opening switch check processing routine ends.

  In S151, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the second winning port winning counter. The second winning port winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit winning number per round has been reached. If this process ends, the process moves to S152.

  In S152, the main CPU 61 sets a second special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second special winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 70, so that the sub-control circuit 70 sets a winning of the game ball to the second special winning opening 37A. Become aware. Thereby, for example, the total number of payouts (the number of payout prize balls) displayed during the big hit is added and displayed. When this process is over, the second big winning opening switch check process routine is finished.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in the following step units. In FIG. 27, the numerical values shown on the sides of S161 to S168 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control state flag in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63 according to the numerical value. As a result, the special symbol game proceeds.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in the first step S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads a control state flag from the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S161.

  In steps S161 to S168 described below, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. The control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any one of the processes from S161 to S168. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes a timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

  In S161, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage check process. The details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S162.

  In S162, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management when the control state flag indicates the special symbol display time management and the variable time has elapsed. The wait time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) is set in the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the processing of S163 is executed after the elapse of the post-determination waiting time. The details of S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S163.

  In S163, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time after determination has elapsed. If the hit is a big hit or a small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the process of S164 is executed after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, when it is not a big hit or a small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S164.

  In S164, the main CPU 61 executes a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the first big win read from the main ROM 62. Data for opening the mouth shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B and data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 in FIG. 18, the main CPU 61 transmits the data and the displacement member 39 for opening the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B stored in the main RAM 63. Data for opening is read out, and a signal for opening the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B and a signal for opening the displacement member 39 are transmitted to the first special winning opening first shutter solenoid. 3610A, the first winning port second shutter solenoid 3610B, and the displacement member solenoid 390. Thus, the main CPU 61 controls opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36. That is, a predetermined advantageous game state (a game in which the first large winning opening 36 first changes a predetermined number of times between an open state in which game balls are easily accepted and a closed state in which it is difficult to accept game balls as a period from the start of one round to the interval. The game state is executed when one round game provided with the state is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of times. In this case, a small hitting game state in which only the first big winning opening 36 is opened or closed twice or three times may be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the first special winning opening 36 is always opened and closed first, but the second special winning opening 37A may be opened and closed first, or the first special winning opening 37A may be first opened or closed. The special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37A may be arbitrarily selected and opened and closed.

  Further, the main CPU 61 sets the value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is being opened in the control state flag, and sets the maximum opening time (for example, 7.1 s of the opening / closing pattern D per round) to the special winning opening time. Set the timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S166. The details of S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S165.

  In S165, the main CPU 61 executes a waiting time management process before reopening of the special winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management before reopening of the special winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds (interval patterns a and b) has elapsed, The memory is updated so that the special winning opening counter is incremented by "1". The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is being opened in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets an opening upper limit time (for example, 7.1 s of the opening / closing pattern D per round) in a special winning opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S166. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the displacement member 39. The details of S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S166.

  In S166, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is being opened, the main CPU 61 has passed the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than “10” and the opening upper limit time ( It is determined whether or not one of the conditions of the special winning opening time timer is “0”). When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 61 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 63 so as to close the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37A. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the special winning opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag in the case of the last round, while the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management before reopening of the special winning opening in the case of not the last round. Is set to the control state flag. The details of S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S167.

  In S167, the main CPU 61 executes a hit end interval management process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval, and when the time corresponding to the hit end interval elapses, sets the control state flag to the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. Set the flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S168.

  In S168, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this processing, when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game, the main CPU 61 sets a value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check. That is, it is set to execute the process of S161. The details of step S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is ended, the special symbol control processing routine is ended.

  As described above, by setting the control state flag, the special symbol game is executed. More specifically, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags to (00H), (01H), and (02H) when the result of the hit determination is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. ) And (07H) in this order, the processes of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 27 are executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and the result of the hit determination is a big hit or a small hit, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags to (00H), (01H), (02H). ), The processes of S161, S162, and S163 shown in FIG. 27 are executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags to (03H), (04H), and (05H) in this order, as shown in FIG. The processing of S164, S166, and S165 shown is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. When the end condition of the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state is satisfied, the processing of S165, S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 27 is performed by sequentially setting (04H), (06H), and (07H). The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is ended.

[Special design memory check process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S171. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol storage check processing routine.

  In S171, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a start memory. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start memory, the process proceeds to S173.

  In S172, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 63. Further, the state in which the special symbol game start memory (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area in which the random number value for hit determination is stored) is "0" for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If it is maintained, a value that permits execution of the demonstration display is set as the demonstration display permission value. Then, when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demonstration display command. The demo display command thus stored is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a demo display command. As a result, the demonstration display is executed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check process routine ends.

  In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence or absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is “0”. That is, if it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S174. If the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not “0”, that is, if it is determined that data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S175 Transfer processing to

  In S174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating a change of the second special symbol as a change state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating a change of the first special symbol as a change state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S176, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S177.

  In S177, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 stores the data in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) in the first special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) is performed, and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area. A process of shifting (storing) each of the data from (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. I do. If this process ends, the process moves to S178.

  In S178, the main CPU 61 executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines one big hit from a plurality of big hit determination tables (not shown) having different numbers of big hit determination values (big hit determination values) according to whether or not the game state flag indicates a certain-variable game state. Select a judgment table. In other words, if the gaming state flag is a value indicating a probable change gaming state, the large hit determination table for high probability having a large number of large hit determination values is referred to, and if the gaming state flag is not a value indicating the probable changing game state, a large hit determination value The big hit determination table for the non-probable changing game state with less is referred to. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probable changing gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is the probable changing gaming state as a special gaming state in which it is easy to shift to the specific gaming state (big hitting gaming state), the big hit gaming state is set. The probability of shifting is higher than the non-probable variable game state as a non-special game state in which it is more difficult to shift to the specific game state than the certain game state as a special game state.

  The special game state is a probable change / time saving game state, and the non-special game state is basically a non-probable change / non-time saving game state.In the present embodiment, the non-special game state includes a non-probable change game state and The case where the time saving game state is set is also included.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is used for judging the hit of the special symbol start storage area which is extracted at the time of winning the game ball and set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). The random number value and the selected big hit determination table are referred to. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the big hit determination value match, the main CPU 61 determines that there is a big hit. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to make the big hit game state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the jackpot probability of winning in the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning in the second starting port 33.

  Thus, in the process of S178, one of the big hit and the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S179.

  In S179, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination process when it is determined in the big hit determination process of S178 that the lottery of the big hit has not been won. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a small hit determination value (small hit determination value) regardless of the gaming state flag.

  Then, the main CPU 61 extracts the random number for hit determination in the special symbol start storage area set in the second special symbol start storage area (0), which is extracted when the game ball is won, and the selected small hit determination table. refer. If the random number for hit determination and the small hit determination value match, the main CPU 61 determines that there is a small hit.

  Since the small hit can occur only in the second special symbol, the small hit determination process is performed only based on the random number for hit determination stored in the second special symbol start storage area. The small hit determination process may be performed based on the hit determination random number stored in the 1 special symbol start storage area.

  As described above, in the processing of S179, either the small hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and if neither the big hit determination processing in S178 nor the small hit determination processing in S179 is won, the special symbol is determined. Loss is determined as the game determination result. If this process ends, the process moves to S180.

  In S180, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol if the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and determines the small hit symbol if the result of the small hit determination is a small hit. If the player also loses the game, a process for determining a loss design is performed. The details of S180 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S181.

  In S181, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines a different variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the processing of S180 and the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processing of S178 and S179. Select the fluctuation pattern determination table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST game state and the normal game state have different variation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 61 determines a variation display mode of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. This processing is the same during the ST game state.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54 is variably displayed in the variation pattern in which the special symbol is determined. The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a variation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received fluctuation pattern designation command. If this process ends, the process moves to S182.

  In S182, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the determined special symbol in the waiting time timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S183.

  Then, in S183, the main CPU 61 executes a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current fluctuation display. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check process routine ends.

[Special design decision processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination processing is executed in the following step units.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a big hit has occurred. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the hit is a big hit, the process proceeds to S191. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, the process moves to S196.

  In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the change state number of the big hit determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating the change of the first special symbol. In this process, if the change state number is a value (01H) indicating that the change is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S192. On the other hand, when the fluctuation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the first special symbol, that is, the main CPU 61 sets the value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the second special symbol. In this case, the process proceeds to S194.

  In S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the winning symbol determining random value. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol of the first special symbol (shown in the first special symbol big hit symbol distribution of FIG. 8) based on the winning symbol determining random number extracted from the big hit symbol determining counter and the big hit determination table. A process is performed to determine whether the symbol corresponds to any one of “probable change 1”, “probable change 2”, “time reduction 1”, and “time reduction 2”. If this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 61 performs the data set of the determined big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the command set of the big hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol and stops and displays the first special symbol in a form based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a big hit symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 from the main CPU 61 as a special symbol designation command. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S199.

  In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol big hit symbol distribution in FIG. 8) based on the winning symbol determining random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determining counter and the big hit determination table. A process is performed to determine which of the symbols corresponds to “probable change 3” to “probable change 5”. If this process ends, the process moves to S195.

  In S195, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined big hit symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of the big hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol and stops and displays the second special symbol in a form based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In addition, the main CPU 61 sets a command of a big hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the command as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S199.

  In S196, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result determined in the small hit determination process (S179 in FIG. 28) is a small hit win. In this processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S197 in case of a small hit winning. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S201 if the small hit is not won.

  In S197, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the small hit symbol of the second special symbol (the second special symbol small hit symbol of FIG. 8) based on the winning symbol determining random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determining counter and the small hit determination table. A process of determining whether the pattern is “small hit 1” or “small hit 2” shown in the distribution is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S198.

  In S198, the main CPU 61 performs a small hit symbol data set and a small hit symbol command set of the determined second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets small hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol and stops and displays the second special symbol in a mode based on the small hit symbol data. The main CPU 61 sets a small hit symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the command to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 from the main CPU 61 as a special symbol designation command. Under the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S199.

  In S199, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S200.

  In S200, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening number-of-times-related data setting process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 sets the special winning opening release number-related data relating to the number of times the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37A are opened, that is, “probable change 1”, “probable change 2”, In the main RAM 63, data corresponding to the symbols "hour reduction 1", "hour reduction 2", or "probable change 3" to "probable change 5" by the second special symbol, or "small hit 1" or "small hit 2" are set. Perform processing. When this processing is ended, the special symbol determination processing routine is ended.

  On the other hand, in S201, when it is determined in S190 that neither a big hit nor a small hit in S196, that is, it is a loss, that is, a loss symbol data set and a loss symbol command set are performed. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a form based on the lost symbol data. The main CPU 61 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in a loss stop display mode. When this processing is ended, the special symbol determination processing routine is ended.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the special symbol fluctuation time management processing executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol fluctuation time management processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. When determining that the value is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S211. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main symbol 61 ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

  In S211, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S212. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine ends.

  In S212, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the process to S213.

  In S213, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied as a symbol stop command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S214.

  In S214, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the determined waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is ended.

[Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special symbol display time management processing executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol display time management processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management processing. When determining that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S221. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management processing, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

  In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management processing is “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

  In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a big hit has occurred. If the main CPU 61 determines that the hit is a big hit, the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the hit is not a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S224.

  In S223, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal game state (non-probable change / non-time saving) in the game state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S233.

  In S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. The time reduction counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games (the number of symbol changes) in the time reduction game state. When the value of the time reduction counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S226. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S225.

  In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  In S226, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability change counter is “0”. The probability change counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games (symbol change frequency) in the probability change game state. When the value of the probability change counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S228. On the other hand, when the value of the probability change counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S227.

  In S227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability change counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S228.

  In S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to change the gaming state according to the values of the time reduction counter and the probability change counter and the value of the gaming state flag. More specifically, the main CPU 61 performs the process of S225, and the value of the time saving counter becomes “0”, or performs the process of S225, and the value of the probability change counter becomes “0”. It is determined that the game state is changed. When changing the gaming state, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S229. On the other hand, when the game state is not to be changed, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S231.

  In S229, the main CPU 61 performs a game state flag change process. More specifically, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value in the game state flag of the main RAM 63 according to the values of the time saving counter and the probability change counter. When the value of the number-of-time-saving counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 is in the non-time-saving game state, when the value of the counter is “1” or more, the time-saving game state. State, if it is "1" or more, it is determined to be a probable change game state, "00H" is in the non-probability change / non-time saving game state, "01H" is in the non-probable change / time reduction game state, and the probable change / non-time reduction game state In this case, "02H" is set in the gaming state flag, and in the probable change / time saving gaming state, "03H" is set in the gaming state flag.

  In S230, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (eg, storing) a game state command in the main RAM 63. The game status command includes a command type (information indicating that the command is a game status command), a game status (non-probable change / non-time saving, probable change / non-time saving, non-probable change / time saving, probable change / time saving), and the number of probable changes. Is a command including information indicating the remaining number of times (“0” or “40”) and information indicating the remaining number of times (“0” or “40”) as the number of time savings. The game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub-CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 70, so that the sub-control circuit 70 recognizes the state of the probable change game state and the time saving game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S231.

  In S231, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a small hit has occurred. When the main CPU 61 determines that the small hit has occurred, the process proceeds to S232. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to S236.

  In S232, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S233. In the present embodiment, as an example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol is 15498 ms when the big hit symbol is “probable change 1”, and is 11496 ms when the other big hit symbol is. The hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 11,496 ms when the big hit symbol is “probable change 3”, 996 ms when the big hit symbol is “probable change 4”, and the small hit symbol is “small hit 2”. In this case, it is 3996 ms. Also, the hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 3996 ms, which is the same as when the big hit symbol is "small hit 1" when the big hit symbol is "probable 5".

  In S233, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to a special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating a start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state and a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern in the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S234.

  In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the special winning opening counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S235.

  In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, the special symbol display time management processing routine is ended.

  In S236, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as a control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, the special symbol display time management processing routine is ended.

[Winning start interval management processing]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit start interval management processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S241. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

  In S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S242. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

  In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a big hit has occurred. When the main CPU 61 determines that the hit is a big hit, the process proceeds to S243. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the hit is not a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S245.

  In S243, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) an upper limit value to the value of the special winning opening counter in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and moves the process to S244.

  In S244, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening counter, and shifts the process to S245.

  In S245, the main CPU 61 sets (stores), in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, hit pattern data indicating a special winning opening / closing pattern corresponding to the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs the round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 12 corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol determined in S245. If this process ends, the process moves to S246.

  In S246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening opening command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The display command during opening of the special winning opening in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The display command during the opening of the special winning opening is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S247.

  In S247, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the special winning opening to a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63, in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S248.

  In S248, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening winning counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S249.

  In S249, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the ejection ball counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S250.

  In S250, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set to 15.1 s according to the value (number of rounds) of the special winning opening counter, for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is the 1R of the “probable change 1”. Is done. If this process ends, the process moves to S251.

In S <b> 251, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables located in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37A. The variables stored in this way are to drive the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 3610 or the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 3710 to open the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37A. Become. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends.
In the present embodiment, in the case of the first hit in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the first big winning opening 36 is always opened, so that data for opening the first big winning opening 36 is set. You. Although the data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here, the data for opening and closing the specific area 38A may be set in other processing.

[Management process during waiting time before reopening of the special winning opening]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the waiting time management process before the special winning opening is reopened, which is executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time management process before reopening of the special winning opening is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before reopening of a special winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening of the special winning opening, the process proceeds to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management process routine.

  In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S262. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management process routine before reopening the special winning opening.

  In S262, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S263.

  In S263, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a special winning opening display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The display command during opening of the special winning opening in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 70 as a special winning opening display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S264.

  In S264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the special winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control status flag in the main RAM 63, in the control status flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S265.

  In S265, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening winning counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S266.

  In S266, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the ejection ball counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S267.

  In S267, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S268.

  In S268, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the waiting-time management process routine before reopening of the special winning opening ends.

[Processing while opening the big winning opening]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the special winning opening performed by the main CPU 61. The processing during opening of the special winning opening is executed in the following step units.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the processing for opening the special winning opening, the process proceeds to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening process, the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening process routine.

  In S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening winning counter is “10” or more. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than “10”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S274. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is not “10” or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S272.

  In S272, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern of each set round in the type of the big hit and the current round, and shifts the process to S273.

  In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening time is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening processing routine.

  In S274, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables located in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variables stored in this way are those for closing the first winning port shutter solenoid 3610 or the second winning port shutter solenoid 3710. If this process ends, the process moves to S275.

  In S275, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value to the remaining sphere monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1098 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process ends, the process moves to S276.

  In S276, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the closed special winning opening is the first special winning opening 36. When determining that the closed special winning opening is the first special winning opening 36, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S277. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the closed special winning opening is not the first special winning opening 36, that is, the second special winning opening 37A, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S278.

  In S277, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value to the discharge monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1998 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process ends, the process moves to S278.

  In S278, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a small hit has occurred. If the main CPU 61 determines that the small hit has occurred, the process proceeds to S283. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S279.

  In S279, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening release frequency counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value of the special winning opening number (the number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the special winning opening release number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the special winning opening number (round number), and determines the value of the special winning opening number counter. Is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of open winning openings. Here, the upper limit of the number of times of opening the special winning opening is, for example, 16R in the case of “probable change 1” of the second special symbol. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening release number counter is equal to or more than the upper limit of the winning opening number, the process proceeds to S283. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening release frequency counter is not equal to or larger than the upper limit of the special winning opening number, the process proceeds to S280.

  In S280, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. Although the time corresponding to the interval patterns a and b is set as the interval display time between rounds, a time different from these may be set. If this process ends, the process moves to S281.

  In S281, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before reopening of the special winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S282.

  In S282, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The display command between rounds is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this processing is ended, the processing routine during opening of the special winning opening is ended.

On the other hand, in S283, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S284.
In the present embodiment, as an example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the first special symbol is 7500 ms when the big hit symbol is “probable change 1” or “probable change 2”, “time saving 1”, “ In the case of "time saving 2", it is 12312 ms. The hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 7500 ms when the big hit symbol is "probable 3", and is 12312 ms when it is "probable 4". When the big hit symbol is “probable change 5” and when the small hit symbol is “small hit 1” and “small hit 2”, the time is 4500 ms.
As another example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is set to 4500 ms or less for all the big hit symbols, and the big hit gaming state related to the second special symbol is more final than the first special symbol. The time from the end of the round to the end of the big hit gaming state may be shortened.

  In S284, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process in the control status flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control status flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S285.

  In S285, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When this processing is ended, the processing routine during opening of the special winning opening is ended.

[Winning end interval management processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the hit end interval management processing executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management processing is executed in the following steps.

  In S290, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control status flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S291. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S301.

  In S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S292. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S301.

  In S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S293.

  In S293, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 is “01H”. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S298.

  In S294, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to “03H”. The game state flag “03H” indicates a probable change / time saving game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S295.

  In S295, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “70” as the number of times of ST to the value of the probability change counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S296.

  In S296, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “70” as the number of time savings to the value of the time saving number counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S297.

  In S297, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “00H” to the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S301.

  In S298, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the small hit has ended. If it is determined that the small hit has ended, the process proceeds to S301. If it is determined that the small hit has not ended, the process proceeds to S299.

  In S299, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to “01H”. The game state flag “01H” indicates a non-probable change / time saving game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S300.

  In S300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “30” or “70” as the number of times saved in the value of the number of times saved counter of the main RAM 63. More specifically, the main CPU 61 sets “30” as the number of time savings when the big hit symbol does not shift to the probable change game state with “time saving 1” or “time saving 2”, and the big hit symbol is “probable change 1” to “ When the game does not shift to the certainty-changing game state in “certainty-change 5”, “70” is set as the number of time savings. If this process ends, the process moves to S301.

  In S301, the main CPU 61 sets a game state command, and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The game state command includes information indicating the game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state and the number of remaining times as the number of time savings (remaining time reduction), and indicates the type of the ended hitting game state (big hit, small hit). This command contains information. The game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end processing is executed in the following step units.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in S310, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing. When determining that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S311. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the special symbol game end processing routine ends.

  In S311, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the special symbol game end process routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, the processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as a display control process.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in the following step units.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing in response to power-on. If this process ends, the process moves to S321.

  In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number values (such as the effect determination random number counter value and the stop symbol determination random number counter value) stored in the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S322.

  In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs a command analysis process. Although the details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing the command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S323. The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S323, the sub CPU 71 performs a display control process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for performing display in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. A display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor) converts various image data such as identification pattern data, background image data, and effect image data based on data for displaying an effect image from the sub CPU 71. The data is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S324.

  In S324, the sub CPU 71 performs a sound control process for controlling sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the sound control circuit 77. If this process ends, the process moves to S325.

  In S325, the sub CPU 71 executes a lamp control process for controlling light emission (lighting / flashing) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. If this process ends, the process moves to S326.

  In S326, the sub CPU 71 performs a movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. If this process ends, the process moves to S321, and thereafter, the processes of S321 to S326 are repeated.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main processing and execute the command reception interrupt processing and the timer interrupt processing even in the state where the main processing is being executed. Hereinafter, the command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 38, and the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving a register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S331.

  In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S332.

  In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S330 to each register. When this process ends, the command reception interrupt processing routine ends.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving a register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S341.

  In S341, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. If this process ends, the process moves to S342. The timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs a press operation button operation determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting the presence / absence of operation of the press operation button 9A. Although this process is actually a determination process, it is an interrupt process, and therefore, is described here as one routine. If this process ends, the process moves to S343.

  In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S340 to each register. When this process ends, the timer interrupt processing routine ends.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by sub CPU 71. This timer updating process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in S350, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”. The discharge error notification timer is a timer for measuring a time for notifying a discharge error. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S354. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S351.

  In S351, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the discharge error notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S352.

  In S352, the sub CPU 71 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S353. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not “0”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S354.

  In S353, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the discharge error notification flag. The discharge error notification flag is a flag by which the sub CPU 71 can identify whether or not to perform the notification of the discharge error. In the case of “00H”, the notification of the discharge error is not performed (terminated), and “01H”. In the case of, a discharge error is notified. If this process ends, the process moves to S354.

  In S354, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the firing stop notification timer is “0”. The firing stop notification timer is a timer for measuring the time for performing the notification of the firing stop (effect “STOP” or the like). If it is determined that the value of the firing stop notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S358. If it is determined that the value of the firing stop notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S355.

  In S355, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the firing stop notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S356.

  In S356, the sub CPU 71 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the firing stop notification timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the firing stop notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S358. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the firing stop notification timer is “0”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S357.

  In S357, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the firing stop notification flag. The firing stop notification flag is a flag that allows the sub CPU 71 to identify whether or not to perform the firing stop notification. In the case of “00H”, the firing stop notification is not performed (terminated), and “01H”. In the case of, a notification of the stop of the firing is issued (continued). If this process ends, the process moves to S358.

  In S358, the sub CPU 71 performs other timer update processing. When this process ends, the timer update process routine ends.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in S360, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S361. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing routine.

  In S361, the sub CPU 71 reads out the data of the received command, and performs a process according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. When the reading of the data of the received command is completed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S362.

  In S362, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S363. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the fluctuation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S365.

  In S363, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data corresponding to the determined effect pattern in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S364.

  In S364, the sub CPU 71 executes a first effect mode change process. The first effect mode change process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S365, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designating command has been received as the command read in S361. When determining that the symbol designating command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S366. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S367.

  In S366, the sub CPU 71 performs a stopped symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration design is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration design data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  The decorative patterns displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numerals “1” to “7”, and these decorative patterns (numbers) are a predetermined number (for example, three (three digits)). Is basically the same as the decorative pattern (number), the game basically shifts to the jackpot game state. More specifically, “probable change 1”, “probable change 2”, “time reduction 1”, “time reduction 2” as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, and “probability 3” to “probable variation” as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol With regard to "5" and "small hit 1" and "small hit 2" as small hits, the decorative designs corresponding to "probable change 1", "probable change 2", "time reduction 1", "time reduction 2" are numbers. The decorative pattern corresponding to any one of "1", "2", "4", "5", or "6", "probable change 3", and "probable change 4" is the numeral "3" or " The decorative pattern corresponding to the "7" line, the "probable change 5" and the "small hit 1" figure corresponds to the specific result of the number "-this-" as a combination of the specific patterns, "small hit 2". The decorative pattern is a specific result that is the number of "appropriate" as a combination of the specific pattern, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the loss is a random pattern other than the specific resultIn addition, the stop symbol does not have to correspond to the specific symbol.

  In S367, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit start display command has been received as the command read in S361. When determining that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S368. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S369.

  In S368, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. In the hit effect pattern determination processing, hit effect patterns for all hits are determined, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S369, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a specific area passage command has been received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passage command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S370. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passage command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S371.

  In S370, the sub CPU 71 executes a V winning notification process. In the V winning award notification process, the effect control based on the game versus the medium passing through the specific area is performed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S371, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening open command has been received as the command read in S361. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening open command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S372. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening open command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S373.

  In S372, the sub CPU 71 executes a round effect process. In the during-round effect processing, processing for executing an effect during a round game is performed, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S373, the sub CPU 71 determines whether an inter-round display command has been received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the display command between rounds has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S374. On the other hand, when determining that the inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S375.

  In S374, the sub CPU 71 executes a round effect process. In the inter-round effect processing, processing for executing an effect between rounds is performed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S375, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit end display command has been received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S376. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the process moves to S377.

  In S376, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. In the hit end effect processing, the effect control at the time of the hit end interval is performed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S377, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command has been received as the command read in S361. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S378. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S379.

  In S378, the sub CPU 71 executes a second effect mode change process. In the second effect mode change process, effect control is performed in accordance with the content of the received game state command. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S379, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an ejection error command has been received as the command read in S361. When determining that the ejection error command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S380. On the other hand, when determining that the ejection error command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S381.

  In S380, the sub CPU 71 executes a discharge error notification process. In this discharge error notification process, a process for performing error notification control when a discharge error occurs is performed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S381, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

[Winning effect pattern determination processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the hit effect pattern determination processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This winning effect pattern determination processing is executed in the following step units.

  As shown in FIG. 42, in S390, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any one of “01H” to “06H” in the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designating information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. "01H" corresponds to the production of "probable change 1" and "probable change 2", "02H" corresponds to the production of "time reduction 1" and "reduction of time 2", and "03H" corresponds to the production of "probability 3". Corresponding to the content, “04H” corresponds to the production content of “probable change 4”, “05H” corresponds to the production content of “probable change 5” and “small hit 1”, and “06H” corresponds to “small hit 2”. Is a value corresponding to the effect content. If this process ends, the process moves to S391.

  In S391, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data according to the type of the hit pattern. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data (data corresponding to the value of the hit effect pattern flag) for executing the effect during the hit start interval. When this process ends, the hit effect pattern determination process routine ends. In order to recognize the hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute different effect patterns for each value of the hit effect pattern, but they may be the same.

[V Prize notification processing]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the V winning award notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. The V winning award notification process is a process for notifying the V winning award, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in S400, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning flag is “01H”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 ends the V winning notification processing routine. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S401.

  In S401, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the V winning flag. The V winning flag is an internal flag indicating whether or not the V winning has been notified. When the notification of the V winning is performed, “01H” is set as the value of the V winning flag, and when the notification of the V winning is not performed, “00H” is set as the value of the V winning flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S402.

In S402, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H” or “02H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the first special symbol is in a big hit. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “01H” or “02H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S405. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H” or “02H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S403.
Note that when the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” (during a “big hit” of “time saving 1” or “time saving 2”), the determination in S402 may not be performed because basically no V prize is won. Further, when the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H", it may be determined to shift to the certainty mode in S403 described later.

  In S403, the sub CPU 71 performs a certain-variable-mode shift determination process. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to shift to the probable change mode. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the probable change mode at 1/10 when “probable change 1” or “probable change 2”, and to set the probable change mode at 10/10 when “probable change 1” or “reduced time 2”. It is determined to shift to. Note that an arbitrary probability can be used as the probability. For example, the same probability may be used for all of “probable change 1”, “probable change 2”, “time reduction 1”, and “time reduction 2”.

  In S404, the sub CPU 71 determines whether to shift to the probable change mode. If the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the probable change mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode does not shift to the probability change mode, the sub CPU 71 ends the V winning notification processing routine.

  In S405, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “03H” to “05H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second special symbol is being hit (except for “small hit 2”). If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is one of “03H” to “05H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S406. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of “03H” to “05H”, the sub CPU 71 ends the V winning notification processing routine.

In S406, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the V winning notification flag. When this process is over, the V winning notification process routine is finished.
As described above, the value “01H” for performing the V-prize notification is set to V only when the positive determination is made in the transition to the probable change mode in S404 or when the second special symbol is hit (excluding the hit of “small hit 2”). Set to the winning notification flag. Thereby, the notification of "V", for example, an effect image corresponding to the V winning is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, and a predetermined sound is generated using the speakers 10a to 10c and the lamp / LED 27. And light emission is performed. In addition, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports in all hits and may be comprised so that it may not alert | report. Further, the configuration may be such that only some of the hits are notified.

[Round production process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the mid-round effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The in-round effect process is a process for determining the effect content for each round, and is executed in the following step units.

  As shown in FIG. 44, in S410, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S411.

  In S411, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the value of the round counter is “2” or less. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the round (1R or 2R) during which the V prize is possible. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the round counter is equal to or smaller than “2”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the round counter is larger than “2”, the sub CPU 71 ends the round effect processing routine.

In S412, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a time saving big hit (either “time saving 1” or “time saving 2”). When determining that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H”, the sub CPU 71 ends the during-round effect processing routine. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the winning effect pattern is not “02H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S413.
In the case of a time-saving jackpot, since it is difficult to win the V, it is not necessary to notify the user of the firing stop (for example, “STOP”). Although this determination processing is provided, this determination processing need not be provided.

  In S413, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value to the value of the firing stop notification timer. For example, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to Y seconds (for example, 12 seconds) shorter than X seconds (for example, 12.1 seconds), which is the time from the first opening start of the displacement member 39 to middle opening. . This value also corresponds to the timing just before the big winning opening opens the middle in the probability change big hit. In addition, an appropriate value can be adopted as long as it can be notified at a time when the V winning is easy. Further, different values may be set according to the type of hit. If this process ends, the process moves to S414.

  In S414, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the firing stop notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S415.

  In S415, the sub CPU 71 sets the round effect data according to the hit effect pattern and the round. In order to recognize the hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern. However, the same effect pattern may be executed. When this processing is ended, the in-round effect processing routine is ended.

[Round effect processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the round effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The inter-round effect process is a process for determining the effect content between target rounds, and is executed in the following step units. Note that S420 to S422 are processes executed when the round ends while the “STOP” effect is being performed.

  As shown in FIG. 45, in S420, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the firing stop notification flag is “01H”. When determining that the value of the firing stop notification flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S421. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the firing stop notification flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S423.

  In S421, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the firing stop notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S422.

In S422, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the firing stop notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S423.
Note that the present embodiment is not limited to the above configuration. For example, when a V prize cannot be won in the first round, the effect of “STOP” may be continued between rounds. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the player and to indicate that no V prize has been won.

  In S423, the sub CPU 71 sets the round effect data according to the winning effect pattern and the round. In order to recognize the hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern. However, the same effect pattern may be executed. When this process ends, the inter-round effect process routine ends.

[Win end effect processing]
FIGS. 46 and 47 are flowcharts showing the hit end effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the hit end interval at the end of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in the following step units.

  As shown in FIG. 46, in S430, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the firing stop notification flag is “01H”. When determining that the value of the firing stop notification flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S431. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the firing stop notification flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S433.

  In S431, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the firing stop notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S432.

  In S432, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the firing stop notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S433.

  In S433, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S434. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S444 of FIG.

  In S434, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "01H" to "04H". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines which one of “probable change 1” to “probable change 4”, “time reduction 1”, and “time reduction 2” is a big hit. When determining that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is one of “01H” to “04H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S435. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not one of “01H” to “04H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S437.

  In S435, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “04H” to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the positive change mode. In the present embodiment, the effect mode flag value “01H” corresponds to the normal mode, “02H” corresponds to the first time-saving mode, “03H” corresponds to the second time-saving mode, and “04H” corresponds to the probable change mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S436.

  In S436, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “70” to the value of the mode counter. Thereby, the probability change mode is executed with the upper limit of the number of games being 70 times. Note that the value of the mode counter is a value displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S449 in FIG.

  In S437, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “05H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines which one of “probable change 5” and “small hit 1” is hit. When determining that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “05H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S438. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “05H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S441.

  In S438, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the natural effect mode of “probable change 5” or “small hit 1” is the first time reduction mode. When determining that the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S439. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is not “02H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S449 of FIG.

  In S439, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “03H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the effect mode becomes the second time-saving mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S440.

In S440, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “70” to the value of the mode counter. Thus, the second time-saving mode is executed with the number of games being 70 times as an upper limit. If this process ends, the process moves to S449 in FIG.
In steps S437 to S440, when the effect mode of the "probable change 5" or "small hit 1" is the first time reduction mode, the mode is shifted to the second time reduction mode, and the value of the mode counter is set to "70". It is composed. However, the present embodiment is not limited to the above configuration. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the value of the mode counter is set to a predetermined value each time a hit ends, regardless of the type of the effect mode in which the user is staying.

  In S441, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning flag is “01H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a V prize has been won in “small hit 2”. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S442. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S444 of FIG.

  In S442, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “02H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the effect mode becomes the first time-saving mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S443.

  In S443, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “30” to the value of the mode counter. Thus, the first time-saving mode is executed with the upper limit of the number of games being 30. If this process ends, the process moves to S449 in FIG.

  In S444 of FIG. 47, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “06H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not “small hit 2”. When determining that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “06H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S445. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “06H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S446.

  In S445, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the game state determination flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S449.

  In S446, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a V-prize is not won during a hit other than the “small hit 2”, and whether or not the winning effect mode is the first time reduction mode. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S449. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the effect mode flag is not “02H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S447.

  In S447, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “02H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the effect mode becomes the first time-saving mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S448.

  In S448, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “30” to the value of the mode counter. Thus, the first time-saving mode is executed with the upper limit of the number of games being 30. In the case of a probability change big hit ("variable change 1" to "probability change 5"), the mode counter value may be set to "70" or a different value. If this process ends, the process moves to S449.

  In S449, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S450.

  In S450, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the V winning flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S451.

  In S451, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the V winning notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S452.

  In S452, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the round counter to “0”. If this process ends, the process moves to S453.

  In S453, the sub CPU 71 sets the hit effect pattern and the hit end effect data according to the round. In order to recognize the end hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern, but it may be configured to execute the same effect pattern. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[First production mode change processing]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a first effect mode change process executed by sub CPU 71. The first effect mode change process is a process for changing the effect mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 48, in S460, the sub CPU 71 performs a time saving counter update process. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the time saving counter included in the received fluctuation pattern designation command to the value of the time saving counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S461.

  In S461, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the normal mode forced transition flag is “01H”. When determining that the value of the normal mode forced transition flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S462. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the normal mode forced transition flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S465.

  In S462, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the mode number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S463.

  In S463, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the effect mode becomes the normal mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S464.

  In S464, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the normal mode forced transition flag. When this process ends, the first effect mode change process routine ends.

  In S465, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the mode transition suspension flag is “01H”. When determining that the value of the mode shift suspension flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S466. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the mode transition suspension flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S474.

  In S466, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect mode promotion determination process. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to promote the effect mode based on the current effect mode. Hereinafter, the details of the processing will be described for each effect mode.

(In the case of the first time saving mode)
When the main-side gaming state is the probability-changing gaming state, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the second time-saving mode with a probability of “5/10” and the first time-saving mode with a probability of “5/10”. Is determined to be maintained. Note that the sub CPU 71 determines that the game is in the probable change game state when the remaining probable change number included in the received fluctuation pattern designation command is 1 or more, and when the remaining probable change number is 0, Is determined to be in the non-probable changing game state.
In addition, when the main-side gaming state is the non-probable changing gaming state, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the second time-saving mode with a probability of “2/10”, and with a probability of “8/10”. It is determined that the one-hour mode is maintained.
In the present embodiment, the probability is shown as “x / y”, but the probability is realized by performing a predetermined random number lottery.

The production mode promotion determination processing in the case of the first time-saving mode is not limited to the above-described processing. For example, a probability such as a mode promotion probability may be further defined as follows based on the number of remaining probabilities of change and / or the number of remaining working hours on the main side. The mode promotion probability is a probability of promotion from the first time-saving mode to the second time-saving mode in the case of the first time-saving mode, and a probability of being promoted from the second time-saving mode to the probable change mode in the case of the second time-saving mode. Means
(Example 1)
If the number of remaining probabilities changes is 31 or more, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift (promote) to the second time saving mode with a probability of “5/10” (maintained with a probability of “5/10”), If the number of remaining probabilities is 1 or more and 30 or less, it is determined that the mode is shifted to the second time-saving mode with a probability of “2/10” (maintained with a probability of “8/10”).
(Example 2)
If the number of remaining working hours is 31 or more, the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode is to be shifted to the second time saving mode with a probability of “5/10” (maintained with a probability of “5/10”), and Is between 1 and 30 times, it is determined to shift to the second time-saving mode with a probability of “2/10” (maintained with a probability of “8/10”).
(Example 3)
When the total of the remaining probability change times and the remaining working hours is equal to or more than 101, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the second working hours mode with the probability of “8/10” (the probability of “2/10”). If the total of the number of remaining probabilities change and the number of remaining hours saved is 51 or more and 100 or less, it is determined to shift to the second time saving mode with a probability of “5/10” (“5/10”). ), And when the total of the number of remaining probabilities and the number of remaining working hours is not less than 1 and not more than 50 times, it is determined to shift to the second working hours mode with a probability of "2/10"(" 8/10 ").

(In the case of the second time-saving mode)
When the game state on the main side is the probability change game state, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the probability change mode with a probability of “2/10”, and maintains the second time-saving mode with a probability of “8/10”. It is determined.
When the main-side gaming state is the non-probable changing gaming state, the sub-CPU 71 determines that the second time-saving mode is to be maintained with a probability of “10/10”.
The production mode promotion determination processing in the case of the second time-saving mode is not limited to the above-described processing. For example, the mode promotion probability may be further defined as in the above (Example 1) or (Example 2) based on the number of remaining probability changes and / or the number of remaining working hours on the main side. In this case, the “second time saving mode” shown in each of (Example 1) and (Example 2) is replaced with “probable change mode”.

(In the case of probable change mode)
The sub CPU 71 determines that the probability change mode is maintained with the probability of “10/10”.
Note that the mode promotion probability is not limited to the value described above, and an appropriate value can be adopted.
When the process in S466 is completed, the process moves to S467. The production mode promotion determination process may be performed at a different timing to promote the production mode.

  In S467, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is determined in the process of S466 that the effect mode is to be promoted. If the sub CPU 71 determines to promote the process, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S468. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the promotion is not performed, the process proceeds to S470.

  In S468, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “03H” or “04H” to the value of the effect mode flag. More specifically, when the current production mode is the first time-saving mode, the sub CPU 71 sets “03H” corresponding to the second time-saving mode to which the transition is made to the value of the production mode flag, and sets the current production mode. If the mode is the second time-saving mode, “04H” corresponding to the transition destination probable change mode is set to the value of the effect mode flag. In addition, it is good also as a structure which shifts a production mode from a 1st time-saving mode to a probability change mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S469.

  In S469, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the time reduction counter to the value of the mode number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S472. It should be noted that a configuration may be employed in which the value of the probability change counter is set to the value of the mode counter. In other words, in this embodiment, the number of times saved and the number of probable changes may be different values, so counting is performed based on the number of times saved, but when the number of times saved and the number of probable changes are the same, Just by setting the value corresponding to the number of times of probability change, the number of times saved can be managed.

  In S470, the sub CPU 71 performs an addition number determination process. If this process ends, the process moves to S471. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating a value obtained by adding the selected value to the number of time savings on the main side. The selection values are “± 0” with a probability of “1/10”, “−10” with a probability of “3/10”, “−20” with a probability of “3/10”, and “3/10” with a probability of “3/10”. And “−30”. When the value set to the value of the mode number counter becomes negative by the calculation, the configuration may be such that the value of the main side time saving number is set as it is, or a predetermined value (“ 10 ") may be set. If this process ends, the process moves to S471.

  In S471, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the determined (calculated) value to the value of the mode number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S472.

  In S472, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data according to whether the promotion or the continuation. For example, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for notifying “not yet”, “+ X (the value of the mode number counter)” and the like. In the present embodiment, the same effect data is set at the time of promotion and at the time of maintenance.However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It may be. If this process ends, the process moves to S473.

  In S473, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the mode transition suspension flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S474.

  In S474, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the mode number counter is “0”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode is the normal mode. When determining that the value of the mode number counter is “0”, the sub CPU 71 ends the first effect mode change processing routine. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the mode number counter is not “0”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S475.

  In S475, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the mode number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S476.

  In S476, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the mode number counter is “0”. When determining that the value of the mode number counter is “0”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S477. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the mode number counter is not “0”, the sub CPU 71 ends the first effect mode change processing routine.

  In S477, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “2” or more. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “2” or more, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S478. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is not “2” or more, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S479. If the value of the time saving counter is "1", the special symbol change ends the time saving gaming state. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not the next special symbol variation is also the time saving gaming state. The determination process is performed.

  In S478, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the mode transition suspension flag. By this processing, processing (S465 to S473, etc.) related to maintenance or promotion of the effect mode is performed in the next fluctuation. If this process ends, the process moves to S480.

  In S479, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the normal mode forced transition flag. With this processing, processing (S461 to S464, etc.) related to the transition to the normal mode is performed in the next change. If this process ends, the process moves to S480.

  In S480, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data indicating the end of the effect mode. In the present embodiment, the effect based on the effect data is executed at the end of the special symbol change. However, the present invention is not limited to this structure, and the effect is performed at a different timing such as at the beginning of the change. It may be. When this process ends, the first effect mode change process routine ends.

[Second production mode change process]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a second effect mode change process executed by sub CPU 71. The second effect mode change process is a process for changing the effect mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in S490, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the gaming state determination flag is “01H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the V prize has been won in “small hit 2”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the gaming state determination flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S491. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the gaming state determination flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S495.

  In S491, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the received game state command is a command indicating a probable change game state and a time saving game state. If it is determined that the gaming state command is a command indicating a probable change / time saving gaming state, the process proceeds to S492. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command is not the command indicating the probable change / time saving gaming state, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S493.

  In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “04H” to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the positive change mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S494.

  In S493, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “02H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the effect mode becomes the first time-saving mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S494.

  In S494, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the number of time savings of the received game state command to the value of the time saving counter and the value of the mode number counter. When this process ends, the second effect mode change process routine ends.

  In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the received gaming state command is a command indicating a time-saving gaming state. When it is determined that the gaming state command is a command indicating a time-saving gaming state, the second effect mode change processing routine ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command is not the command indicating the time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S496.

  In S496, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the mode number counter to “0”. If this process ends, the process moves to S497.

  In S497, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the time reduction counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S498.

In S498, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the effect mode flag. When this process ends, the second effect mode change process routine ends.
Note that the present embodiment is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, when the value of the mode number counter is “0”, the value of the time reduction counter is “0”, and the value of the effect mode flag is “01H”, the processing of S495 to S498 may be omitted.

[Emission error notification processing]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a discharge error notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. This discharge error notification process is a process for notifying a discharge error, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in S500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value to a discharge error notification timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 30 seconds. Note that the discharge error may be notified until the power is turned off without applying the discharge error notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S501.

  In S501, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification flag is “00H”. When determining that the value of the discharge error notification flag is “00H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S502. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the discharge error notification flag is not “00H”, the sub CPU 71 ends the discharge error notification processing routine.

  In S502, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the discharge error notification flag. Thereby, the notification of the discharge error is performed. When this process ends, the discharge error notification process routine ends.

  FIGS. 51 to 53 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect screen and an effect screen flow. In the following, a case where the effect mode is shifted in the order of the normal mode, the first time-saving mode, the second time-saving mode, the first time-saving mode, the probability change mode, and the first time-saving mode will be described as an example. Will be described. For convenience of explanation, the value of the time saving counter and the value of the probability change counter updated by the main CPU 61 are shown.

SC1 to SC59 are effect contents displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. On the screen, a decorative pattern display section for displaying decorative patterns (left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, right decorative pattern), a player A mode display unit that can identify the production mode, a time saving number display unit that allows the player to recognize the number of time savings, an instruction display unit that displays instructions related to the firing of game balls, etc. are displayed as appropriate, and the content is according to various states. Is changed.
SC1 shows a mode in which the decorative symbols fluctuate in the normal mode. In this example, since the lottery of the first special symbol was won, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped (SC2, SC3), and the fact that the big hit has been reached is displayed on the screen (SC4), and the first special symbol of the big hit is won. (SC5 to SC7). In the production related to the big hit, in order to support (prompt) the V winning by the player, the instruction display section notifies the firing timing of the game ball (an example of the notification “STOP” for instructing not to perform the firing, the firing). An example of a notification instructing to perform the operation is “right-handed” or the like.
Then, after the end of the big hit, it is notified that the effect mode has been shifted to the first time reduction mode (SC8). In this example, since the V-prize is won during the big hit, the value of the time-saving counter and the value of the probability change counter are set internally to 70 times, but 30 times are displayed on the screen (SC9). . At this time, the player cannot know whether or not a V prize has been won.
Thereafter, the game progresses, and the number of times saved in the number of hours saved display unit becomes 0 (SC9 to SC14), and it is notified that the first time saving mode has ended (SC15). However, since the value of the time reduction counter is "41" internally, an effect for notifying that the first time reduction mode is continued is performed (SC16).

In addition, the game progresses, and in the present example, the jackpot of “probable change 5” is won, so that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as “6 hit 6” (SC19), and subsequently, the “hit” is notified (SC20). Here, not only “probable change 5” but also “small hit 1” can result in a stop mode of “6 hits 6”. Further, in “hit”, it is determined which hit is (big hit or small hit). Since it cannot be determined, the player cannot recognize the type of hit from this effect.
Subsequently, a notification ("STOP", "right strike", etc.) relating to the timing of launching the game ball is made on the instruction display section (SC21, SC22), and in this example, the player makes the specific area 38 win the game ball. Therefore, "V" indicating that the game ball has won the specific area 38 is displayed on the screen (SC22). Since this “V” display is displayed for both “probable change 5” and “small hit 1”, the player cannot grasp the hit type even by this effect.
After the end of the big hit, it is notified that the effect mode has shifted to the second time reduction mode (SC23).

  In addition, since the game progresses and the jackpot of “probable change 5” is won in this example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as “5 hits 5” (SC25), and the instruction display section notifies the launch timing of the game ball (“ "STOP", "Right strike", etc.) (SC26, SC27). In this example, since the player has won the game ball in the specific area 38, "V" is displayed on the screen (SC27). After the end of the big hit, it is notified that the effect mode has continued the second time reduction mode (SC28). In the present embodiment, since the V prize is won at “probability change 5”, 70 times are internally set to the value of the time saving counter and the value of the probability change counter. On the other hand, on the screen, when the same production mode continues, the number of times is taken over, and 60 times are displayed (SC29).

In addition, the game progresses, and in this example, the winning of "small hit 1" is won, so the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as "4 hit 4" (SC30). In this case, it is notified that the effect mode has shifted from the second time-saving mode to the first time-saving mode, because no game ball has won the specific area 38 (SC31, SC32). In the present embodiment, since “small hit 1”, the value of the time saving counter and the value of the probability change counter are internally the number before the small hit (11 times in this example).
In addition, the game progresses (SCSC33 to SC38), and in this example, the win is "winning 2". Therefore, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as "winning" (SC39), and the winning is achieved in "winning 2". The user is notified of the fact (SC40). In the present embodiment, at the hit of "small hit 2", an effect related to a method of identifying whether or not the game state is the certainty-changing game state is performed. In this example, an effect of "the game state can be determined unless a V prize is won!" Is displayed on the screen (SC41). That is, from the effects up to now, the player cannot determine whether the game state is the probable change game state, but by performing the game according to the present effect, the player can identify whether the probable change state is present. become.
In this example, since the game ball did not win in the specific area 38, an effect of "entering the probability change mode" is displayed on the screen (SC42). From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible for the player to grasp that the game is in a certain-change game state.
In addition, the game progresses, and in this example, a screen flow when a jackpot of “probable change 4” is won and then a jackpot of “probable change 5” is won is shown (SC43 to SC59).

FIG. 54 is a diagram (modified example) showing the special winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval time between rounds. The difference from the contents shown in FIG. 12 is that the hit pattern is defined such that the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37A open and close alternately.
More specifically, for example, in the “winning pattern 1”, the first big winning opening 36 is opened and closed in a manner of the opening and closing pattern A on the second round, and the second big winning opening 37A is opened and closed on the third round. The opening and closing is performed in the mode of the pattern I, and the fourth winning opening 36 is opened and closed in the mode of the opening and closing pattern A on the 4R, and the second winning opening 37A is opened and closed in the mode of the opening and closing pattern I on the 5R. Is performed.

  Next, other modes (modifications) of the winning device mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), the first mode of the winning device mechanism includes a first special winning opening first count switch 360A, a first special winning opening second count switch 360B, a first special winning opening shutter 361A, and a first special winning opening shutter 361A. This is realized by including the one-large winning opening shutter 361B, the rolling area 372, the specific area 38A, the non-specific area 38B, the outlets 38X and 38Y, and the displacement member 39.

When the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B are closed, the first special winning opening shutter 361A is in the upper stage, the rolling area 372 is in the middle stage, and the first special winning opening shutter 361B is in the lower stage. Thus, each component has a step shape. Therefore, when each shutter is closed, the game ball can roll in the order of the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, and the first special winning opening shutter 361B.
The winning device mechanism shown in FIG. 5 differs from the winning device mechanism shown in FIG. 5 in the presence or absence of a second big winning opening shutter 371A, and the other configuration is the same.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the second mode of the winning device mechanism includes a first special winning opening first count switch 360A, a first special winning opening second count switch 360B, a first special winning opening third count switch. 360C, first winning opening shutter 361A, first winning opening shutter 361B, first winning opening shutter 361C, second winning opening shutter 371A, rolling area 372, rolling area 373, specific area 38A, unspecified This is realized including the area 38B, the outlets 38X and 38Y, and the displacement member 39.
The first special winning opening shutter 361A, the first special winning opening shutter 361B, and the first special winning opening shutter 361C are simultaneously opened and closed, and the first special winning opening 36A, the first special winning opening 36B, and The first big winning opening 36C is simultaneously opened and closed.

In the winning combination mechanism, a first winning opening shutter 361A is provided at the top right, and a first winning opening first count switch is provided below (in this example, directly below) the first winning opening shutter 361A. 360A is provided.
On the other hand, a rolling area 372 is provided on the lower left of the first special winning opening shutter 361A, and a first special winning shutter 361B is provided on the lower left of the rolling area 372. A first special winning opening second count switch 360B is provided below the first special winning opening shutter 361B (just below in this example).
A rolling area 373 is provided below and to the left of the first special winning opening shutter 361B, and a first special winning opening shutter 361C is provided below and to the left of the rolling area 373. Then, below the first special winning opening shutter 361C (directly below in this example), a first special winning opening third count switch 360C, a displacement member 39, a specific area 38A, and a discharge opening 38X are sequentially provided. .
In the winning mechanism, a non-specific area 38B and an outlet 38Y are sequentially provided at the bottom.
Next, looking at the positional relationship in which the game balls can pass through each of the special winning openings, the position where the game ball can pass through the first special winning opening first count switch 360A (the first special winning opening 36A) and the position of the first special winning opening No. The position that can pass through the two-count switch 360B (the first special winning opening 36B) and the position that can pass through the first large winning opening third count switch 360C (the first special winning opening 36C) are provided in this order.

  When the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the first special winning opening shutter 361B, and the first special winning opening shutter 361C are closed, the first special winning opening shutter 361A is in the first stage, and the rolling area 372 is in the second stage. Each of the components has a stepped shape such that the first winning opening shutter 361B is the third step, the rolling region 373 is the fourth step, and the first winning opening shutter 361C is the fifth step. Therefore, in a state where each shutter is closed, the game ball rotates in the order of the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, the first special winning opening shutter 361B, the rolling area 373, and the first special winning opening shutter 361C. It is movable. When the second special winning opening shutter 371A is open, the game ball that has passed over the first special winning opening shutter 361C passes through the second special winning opening 37A and is guided to the back side of the final winning mechanism. .

Next, when the game ball reaches each of the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the first special winning opening shutter 361B, and the first special winning opening shutter 361C, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is opened. Will be described.
Here, each of the shutters (the first special winning opening shutter 361A to the first special winning opening shutter 361C and the second special winning opening shutter 371A) performs an opening / closing operation (driving) according to the pattern shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. Will be At this time, the first special winning opening shutter 361A to the first special winning opening shutter 361C perform the opening and closing operation (driving) at the same time as opening and closing the first special winning opening 36A to the first special winning opening 36C. The winning opening shutter 371A opens and closes when opening and closing the second winning opening 37A.
(The first big winning opening shutter 361A is open)
The game ball passes through the first special winning opening first count switch 360A, and then passes through the non-specific area 38B and the discharge opening 38Y provided below. It should be noted that the game ball that has passed the first special winning opening first count switch 360A does not pass through the specific area 38A.
(The first big winning opening shutter 361B is open)
After passing through the first special winning opening second count switch 360B, the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B and the discharge opening 38Y provided below. It should be noted that the game ball that has passed the first special winning opening second count switch 360B does not pass through the specific area 38A.
(The first big winning opening shutter 361C is open)
The game ball passes through the first special winning opening third count switch 360C (first special winning opening 36C) and reaches the displacement member 39. At this time, when the displacement member 39 is open, the game ball passes through the specific area 38A and the discharge port 38X. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A, but passes through the non-specific area 38B provided below and the discharge port 38Y.
The winning device mechanism is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, four or more shutters for the first special winning opening may be provided instead of three. Further, for example, the shutter for the second special winning opening may not be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the third mode of the winning device mechanism is realized including the same components as the second mode.

In the winning combination mechanism, a first winning opening shutter 361A is provided at the top right, and a first winning opening first count switch is provided below (in this example, directly below) the first winning opening shutter 361A. 360A is provided.
On the other hand, a rolling area 372 is provided on the lower left of the first special winning opening shutter 361A, and a first special winning shutter 361B is provided on the lower left of the rolling area 372. A first special winning opening second count switch 360B is provided below the first special winning opening shutter 361B (just below in this example).
A rolling area 373 is provided below and to the left of the first special winning opening shutter 361B, and a first special winning opening shutter 361C is provided below and to the left of the rolling area 373. Further, below the first special winning opening shutter 361C (directly below in this example), a first special winning opening third count switch 360C is provided.
In the winning mechanism, a displacement member 39, a specific area 38A, and an outlet 38X are sequentially provided on the left side at the bottom, and a non-specific area 38B and an outlet 38Y are provided sequentially on the right side. Have been.

Next, when the game ball reaches each of the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the first special winning opening shutter 361B, and the first special winning opening shutter 361C, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is opened. Are the same in both cases, and therefore, a description will be given of a state in which the first special winning opening shutter 361A is opened as an example. The opening and closing operations (driving) of the shutters (first special winning opening shutter 361A to first special winning opening shutter 361C and second special winning opening shutter 371A) are the same as those in FIG. Description is omitted.
The game ball can reach the displacement member 39 after passing through the first special winning opening first count switch 360A. When the displacement member 39 is opened when reaching the displacement member 39, the game ball passes through the specific area 38A and the discharge port 38X. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 does not reach or reaches the displacement member 39 but the displacement member 39 is closed, the game ball does not pass through the specific region 38A, the non-specific region 38B, and the discharge port 38Y. Will be passed.
Here, in the state where the specific area 38A is open (the displacement member 39 is open), the possibility (ease of passing) that the game ball passes through the specific area 38A is determined as the first large winning opening first count. The switch 360A, the first special winning opening second count switch 360B, and the first special winning opening third count switch 360C are configured to be higher in this order. On the other hand, in a state where the specific area 38A is open, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B as a first big winning opening first count switch 360A, a first big winning opening second count switch 360B, The first large winning opening third count switch 360C is configured to be lower in order.
The winning device mechanism is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, four or more shutters for the first special winning opening may be provided instead of three. Further, for example, the shutter for the second special winning opening may not be provided.

FIGS. 56A to 56C show a fourth mode of the winning mechanism. FIG. 56 (a) is a front view of the winning mechanism with the second special winning opening shutter 371A and the second special winning opening shutter 371B closed (when closed), and FIG. 56 (b) is a second special winning opening. It is a front view of the winning mechanism with the shutter 371A and the second special winning opening shutter 371B opened (at the time of opening), and (c) shows that there is one second special winning opening 37A. And a front view of the winning mechanism when the partition plate 371X is removed. As shown in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the partition plate 371X is provided in front of the second special winning opening 37, and the internal spaces communicate with each other.
As shown in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the fourth mode of the winning device mechanism includes a first special winning opening first count switch 360A, a first special winning opening second count switch 360B, a first special winning opening. A third count switch 360C, a first special winning opening shutter 361A, a first special winning opening shutter 361B, a first special winning opening shutter 361C, a second special winning opening shutter 371A, a second special winning opening shutter 371B, a partition plate 371X, The rolling area 372, the rolling area 373, the specific area 38A, the non-specific area 38B, the outlets 38X and 38Y, and the displacement member 39 are realized.
As described above, since the second special winning opening 37 communicates with the inside, even if only one second special winning opening count switch (not shown) is provided, the winning of the second special winning opening 37 is achieved. Can be detected. However, a second special winning opening count switch (not shown) is provided corresponding to each of the second special winning opening shutter 371A and the second special winning opening shutter 371B, and the game ball is set to the second large winning opening shutter corresponding to any shutter. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is possible to identify whether or not the winning opening 37 (the second winning opening 37A, the second winning opening 37B) has been won.

The arrangement of the components in the winning winning mechanism is the same as that of the second mode shown in FIG. 55B except for the second special winning opening shutter 371A and the second special winning opening shutter 371B. I do. When the game ball reaches each of the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the first special winning opening shutter 361B, and the first special winning opening shutter 361C, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is opened. Are the same as those in the second embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted. When each of the shutters is opened when the game ball reaches each of the second special winning opening shutter 371A and the second special winning opening shutter 371B, the game ball is set to the second special winning corresponding to each shutter. It passes through the mouth 37A or the second winning port 37B, is guided to the back side of the winning mechanism, and does not pass through the specific area 38A or the non-specific area 38B.
Each of the shutters (first large winning opening shutter 361A to first large winning opening shutter 361C, second large winning opening shutter 371A, and second large winning opening shutter 371B) of the main winning mechanism is shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. An opening / closing operation (driving) is performed according to the pattern. At this time, the first special winning opening shutter 361A to the first special winning opening shutter 361C perform opening and closing operations (driving) at the same time as opening and closing the first special winning opening 36A to the first special winning opening 36C, and perform the second large winning opening shutter 361C. The winning opening shutter 371A and the second winning opening shutter 371B open and close simultaneously when opening and closing the second winning opening 37A and the second winning opening 37B.

Next, looking at the positional relationship in which the game balls can pass through each of the special winning openings, a position where the game ball can pass through the first special winning opening first count switch 360A (the first special winning opening 36A) and the second special winning opening No. A position that can pass through the 1 count switch 370A (the first special winning opening 37A), a position that can pass through the first large winning opening second count switch 360B (the first special winning opening 36B), and a second count of the second special winning opening. The position that can pass through the switch 370B (the first special winning opening 37B) and the position that can pass through the first large winning opening third count switch 360C (the first special winning opening 36C) are provided in this order.
In other words, the position (area) where the game ball can pass through the first special winning opening 36A realizes the first passing area, and the position where the game ball can pass through the first special winning opening 36B realizes the second passing area. The position that can pass through the second special winning opening 37A realizes a third passing area, and the position that can pass through the second special winning opening 37B realizes a fourth passing area and passes through the first special winning opening 36C. Possible positions realize a fifth pass area. Also, the first special winning opening shutter 361A realizes a first displacement member, the first special winning opening shutter 361B realizes a second displacement member, and the second special winning opening shutter 371A realizes a third displacement member. The second special winning opening shutter 371B realizes a fourth displacement member, and the first special winning opening shutter 361C realizes a fifth displacement member.
Further, the present embodiment is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, in one round game, a plurality of shutters are configured to be movable in order to open and close a plurality of passing areas. However, even if a single shutter is configured to open and close a plurality of passing areas. Good.

<Effect obtained by the above-described configuration>
According to the above-described configuration, for example, a "hit time 1" big hit game state in which it is difficult for game balls to pass to the specific area 38A, and a "probable change 2" big hit game in which game balls easily pass to the specific area 38A. And the state of the open state of the second variable winning device in one or a plurality of rounds (for example, the first round) of these jackpot gaming states can be the first time (for example, 5.1 s) (FIG. 8 to 12 and 14). In this manner, in the big hit game state of “time saving 1” where it is difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A, there is no disadvantage compared with the big hit game state of “probable change 2” where the game ball easily passes to the specific area 38A. By providing the points, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which the degree of advantage is significantly reduced, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, the big hit game state of “time saving 2” in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass to the specific area 38A, and the big hit game of “probable change 1” in which the game ball easily passes to the specific area 38A. States are provided. The time of the open state of the second variable winning device in one or a plurality of rounds (for example, the 1R) of the jackpot game state of “time saving 2” is the first time (7.1 s), and the jackpot game of “probable change 1” The time of the open state of the second variable winning device in the state is a third time (3.1 s) shorter than the first time (FIGS. 8 to 13 and the like). As described above, in the big hit game state of “time saving 2” in which it is difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A, it is more advantageous than in the big hit game state of “probable change 1” in which the game ball easily passes to the specific area 38A. By providing the points, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which the degree of advantage is significantly reduced, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

  In the above-described configuration, for example, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A in the small hitting game state of “small hitting 2”, the notification as to whether or not the game is controlled to the certainty changing game state (for example, “V The game state can be determined! "(FIG. 53, etc.). Therefore, by not allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A in the small hitting game state of "small hitting 2", the player can know whether or not the game is in the surely changing game state.

  In the above-described configuration, for example, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A in the small hitting game state of “small hitting 1”, the notification is performed both when the game is controlled to the certain-variable game state and when the game is not controlled. (For example, an effect of “V”) is performed (FIG. 52 and the like). According to this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the player is in the probable change game state.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, the probable change mode ends when the probable change game state ends, but when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A during the “probable change 5” jackpot game state, the predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) ) Is possible (FIG. 16 and the like). Therefore, if the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A during the jackpot game state of “probable change 5” is repeated, the probable change game state does not end, and the probable change mode does not need to end.
On the other hand, even if a game ball passes through the specific area 38A during the small hitting game state of "small hitting 1", the certain number of positively changing game states cannot be performed again. Therefore, if the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A during the small hitting game state of "small hitting 1" is repeated, the certainty-changing game state ends and the certainty-changing mode ends.
However, in the big hitting game state of “probable change 5” and the small hitting game state of “small hit 1”, even if a game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the probable change mode continues. I don't know if was established.
Therefore, even if it is possible to recognize the first production mode by confirming the production, the probabilistic mode ends suddenly or the probabilistic mode continues for a much longer period than expected. , Since the probable game state ends suddenly or continues for a much longer period than expected, it is difficult to recognize how long the probable game state will last, and Improvement can be achieved.
In the small hitting game state of “small hit 1”, the certainty changing game state does not end due to the game ball not passing through the specific area 38A. If the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A, the probable change mode ends, similarly to the end of the probable game state. This makes it even more difficult to recognize from the effect mode that the game state is the probable change game state.

  In the above-described configuration, for example, in the big hitting game state of “probable change 5” and the small hitting game state of “small hit 1”, the notification performed when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A (“probable change 5” and “ The "V" effect performed when a V prize is won in any of the "small hit 1" is the same, and the second variable prize winning device (for example, the first large prize opening shutter 361A, the first large prize opening shutter) 361B) are the same or substantially the same (FIGS. 8 to 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 52, etc.). In this way, by making it more difficult to recognize the big hit game state of “probable change 5” and the small hit game state of “small hit 1”, it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize how long the probable change game state continues. It is possible to further enhance the interest in the probable change game state.

  In the above-described configuration, for example, in the small hitting game state of “small hitting 1”, the certain-variable game state does not end due to the game ball not passing through the specific area 38A, but the game ball Does not pass, the first time-saving mode is notified after the big hitting game state of “probable change 5” and after the small hitting game state of “small hit 1” (for example, “first time-saving mode”). The effect of “mode entry” is performed), so that it is possible to make it appear as if the probable change game state has ended (FIG. 16, FIG. 52, etc.).

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, in the small hitting game state of "small hitting 2", a game ball is not passed through the specific area 38A, thereby notifying whether or not the game state is the certainty changing game state. (See FIGS. 16, 53, etc.).

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, in the big hit game state, after controlling the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B to the first position, the second special winning opening shutter 371A is set to the first position. After that, it is possible to control the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B to the first position (FIG. 54 and the like). Further, the game ball passes through a position that can pass through the first large winning opening 37A after passing through a position that can pass through the first large winning opening 36A, and then passes through a position that can pass through the first large winning opening 36B. It is possible. According to such a configuration, game balls that have not passed through the first special winning opening 36A when the first special winning opening shutter 361A is at the first position are prevented from being missed by the second special winning opening 37A. Further, game balls that have not passed through the second special winning opening 37A when the second special winning opening shutter 371A is in the first position can be prevented from being missed by the first special winning opening 36B. it can. In this way, in the big hit game state, a situation in which the player loses the game ball, which is disadvantageous, can be reduced, so that the interest can be improved.

  The term “missing” means that, in the state of the jackpot game, a game ball fired for winning a prize in the special winning opening does not win any of the special winning prizes.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, the big hit game state of “time saving 2” in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass to the specific area 38A, and the big hit game of “probable change 1” in which the game ball easily passes to the specific area 38A. In the big hit game state of “time saving 2”, the time that can pass through the pass area is the first time (for example, 7.1 s), and in the big hit game state of “probable change 1”, it is possible to pass through the pass area. The time is a third time (for example, 3.1 s) that is equal to or shorter than the first time (FIGS. 8 to 13 and the like). As described above, in the big hit game state of “time saving 2” where it is difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A, it is possible to pass through the pass area more than the second big hit game state in which the game ball easily passes to the specific area 38A. By providing a configuration in which the time is not shortened and by providing a point that is less disadvantageous in the big hit game state of “hour saving 2” than in the big hit game state of “probable change 1”, it is possible to further improve the interest.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, in the big hit game state, the first large winning opening shutter 361A, the first large winning opening shutter 361B, and the first large winning opening shutter 361C are controlled to the first position, The control to set the winning opening shutter 371A and the second winning opening shutter 371B to the first position can be alternately performed (FIG. 56 and the like). In this way, in the big hit game state, by preventing the game balls that have not passed through the special winning opening when the shutters are at the first position from being missed, it is difficult for the player to miss the game balls. Since a situation in which a profit is generated can be further reduced, the interest can be further improved.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, in the big hit game state, the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B and the second special winning opening shutter 371A and the second special winning opening shutter 371B are alternately opened and closed. (FIG. 56 etc.). For example, in the big hit gaming state, the first big winning opening shutter 361A, the first big winning opening shutter 361B, the first big winning opening shutter 361C, the second big winning opening shutter 371A and the second big winning opening shutter 371B. Can alternately open and close. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game balls that have not passed through the passage area from being missed when the respective shutters are at the first position, thereby improving the interest in the big hit game state. Can be.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, components that are the same as or similar to the components described in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

[Prize winning mechanism]
The winning device mechanism of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 57A is a front view of the winning mechanism with the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B closed (when closed), and FIG. 57B is a first special winning opening. It is a front view of the winning mechanism with the shutter 361A and the first big winning opening shutter 361B opened (when opened).

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the winning combination mechanism includes a first special winning opening first count switch 360A, a first special winning opening second count switch 360B, a first special winning opening shutter 361A, a first special winning opening. The opening shutter 361B, the rolling area 372, the specific area 38A, the non-specific area 38B, the outlets 38X and 38Y, and the displacement member 39 are realized. In the present pachinko gaming machine, the game ball fired by “right hit” basically flows down the right side of the stage 31 and reaches the first special winning opening shutter 361A, and the first special winning opening shutter 361A. When the first special winning opening shutter 361B is closed, the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, and the first special winning opening shutter 361B are sequentially rolled. Further, in the present embodiment, when “right-handed” is performed while the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B are open, the detection is performed by the first special winning opening second count switch 360B. Without being detected by the first special winning opening first count switch 360A. For this reason, the game ball is configured not to pass through the specific area 38A even when “right-handed” is performed while the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B are open.

In the winning device mechanism, a first special winning opening shutter 361A for opening and closing the first special winning opening 36A is provided at the upper right corner. A first special winning opening first count switch 360A is provided below (just below in this example) the first special winning opening shutter 361A.
A rolling area 372 is provided at the lower left of the first special winning opening shutter 361A, and a first special winning shutter 361B is provided at the lower left of the rolling area 372. Then, below the first special winning opening shutter 361B (directly below in this example), a first special winning opening second count switch 360B, a displacement member 39, a specific area 38A, and a discharge opening 38X are sequentially provided. .
In the winning mechanism, a non-specific area 38B and a discharge port 38Y are sequentially provided at the bottom.

  When the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B are closed, the first special winning opening shutter 361A is in the upper stage, the rolling area 372 is in the middle stage, and the first special winning opening shutter 361B is in the lower stage. Thus, each component has a step shape. Therefore, when each shutter is closed, the game ball can roll in the order of the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, and the first special winning opening shutter 361B.

  Next, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is opened when the game ball reaches each of the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B will be described.

(The first big winning opening shutter 361A is open)
As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the game ball passes through the first special winning opening first count switch 360A, and then passes through the non-specific area 38B and the discharge opening 38Y provided below. Become. It should be noted that the game ball that has passed the first special winning opening first count switch 360A does not pass through the specific area 38A.

(The first big winning opening shutter 361B is open)
The game ball passes through the first special winning opening second count switch 360B and reaches the displacement member 39. At this time, when the displacement member 39 is open, the game ball passes through the specific area 38A and the discharge port 38X. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A, but passes through the non-specific area 38B provided below and the discharge port 38Y.

[Amusement machine specifications]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, specifications regarding gaming characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the present embodiment, the hit probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol including the small hit probability described later is 1/80 (25/2000) at the time of low probability (non-probable changing game state). ), At high probability (probable change game state), it is 1 / 76.9 (26/2000). The small hit probability of the small hit game state is 0 for the first special symbol and 1/100 (20/2000) for the second special symbol. The probabilities at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability in the jackpot probability are not limited to those described above. Probabilities that are more likely to be won at the time of high probability than at the time of low probability can be appropriately adopted. Further, the small hit may not be won.
As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is preferentially digested. Note that the order of digestion may be a winning order, or the first special symbol may be prioritized.
As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability change game state), the ST game state in which the probability change game state continues up to 30 times as the number of games (the number of times of the change of the special symbol) is mounted. Note that the number of STs is not limited to the above. Further, the probable change game state may be continued until the next big hit winning.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. In other words, in the first special symbol big hit symbol “probable change 1”, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (winning pattern) is “hit pattern 1”, 5R is given as the number of rounds of the round game, and the bonus content is “probable change big hit”. 1 ". The probability (selection rate) of “probable change 1” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 40/100.

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “probable change 2”, the winning pattern is “hit pattern 1”, and the bonus content is “probably changed big hit 2”. The selection rate of the big hit symbol “probable change 2” of the first special symbol is set to 40/100.

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “probable change 3”, the hit pattern is “hit pattern 1”, and the bonus content is “probable change big hit 3”. The selectivity of the big hit symbol “probable change 3” of the first special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the big hit symbol “probable change 4” of the first special symbol, the win pattern is “hit pattern 1”, and the bonus content is “probable change big 4”. The selection rate of the big hit symbol “probable change 4” of the first special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probable change 5”, the hit pattern is “hit pattern 2”, 8R is given as the number of rounds of the round game, and the bonus content is “probable change big 5”. The selection rate of the jackpot symbol “probable change 5” of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probable change 6”, the hit pattern is “hit pattern 2”, and the bonus content is “probable change big hit 6”. The selection rate of the jackpot symbol “probable change 6” of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probable change 7”, the winning pattern is “hit pattern 2”, and the bonus content is “probably changed big hit 7”. The selection rate of the big hit symbol “probable change 7” of the second special symbol is set to 70/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol "probable change 8", the hit pattern is "hit pattern 2", and the bonus content is "probable change big 8". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol “probable change 8” of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.

In the big hit symbol “probable change 9” of the second special symbol, the winning pattern is “hit pattern 2”, and the bonus content is “probably changed big hit 9”. The selectivity of the big hit symbol “probable change 9” of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.
In the small hit symbol “small hit 1”, the hit pattern is “hit pattern 3”, and the bonus content is “special hit 2”. The selection rate of the small hit symbol “small hit 1” is set to 100/100.
It should be noted that the small hit game state does not have the concept of a round game unlike the big hit game state, and thus the number of rounds is not specified.

  Further, the number of rounds is not limited to 5R and 8R, and a jackpot of another round number may be provided. In addition, the types of jackpots are not limited to those described above. The types of big hits of the first special symbol may be increased, and the kinds of big hits of the second special symbol may be increased.

  The large winning opening count is set to count up to 10 as the upper limit winning number per round. The count number (specified number / maximum winning number) of the large winning prize is “10”, but is not limited thereto. Ordinarily, the winning probability of a symbol is set to be 0/257 when the probability is low, and 257/257 when the probability is high. Note that the probabilities at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability are not limited to those described above. Probabilities that are more likely to be won at the time of high probability than at the time of low probability can be appropriately adopted. In addition, the winning may be performed at a low probability.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 59, a plurality of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as an opening / closing pattern of one round (one round opening / closing pattern) for the first special winning opening 36.
The opening / closing patterns A and B are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening / closing pattern C is an opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit gaming state. The opening / closing pattern C in the small hitting game state is not defined as one round, but is shown together with other opening / closing patterns A and B for convenience. The first special winning opening 36A is appropriately referred to as a special winning opening. Opening / closing patterns A to C shown in FIG. 59 are merely examples, and specific times for defining the opening / closing patterns may be other than those shown. The opening pattern of the special winning opening is not limited to the above three types. Two or less types may be provided, or four or more types may be provided. However, when four or more types of opening / closing patterns of the special winning opening are provided, it is preferable to provide a number of hits corresponding to the provided number.

The opening / closing pattern A is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 14 s, the closed state is 4 s, and then the open state is continued for 14 s. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. The round section is similarly defined as the period from the first open state to the final closed state in the other opening / closing patterns B and C.
The section where the open state is 14 s is a long open where the open state of the special winning opening is relatively long. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, after one long opening occurs, one long opening occurs again after passing through the closed state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 28 s.
For convenience of description, a section in which the open state is 0.1 s or less is referred to as short open, a section in which the open state is longer than 0.1 s and less than 14 s is referred to as middle open, and a section in which the open state is 14 s or longer is referred to as long open.
It should be noted that in the open state in which the short opening is performed, it is extremely difficult to win the game ball in the large winning opening, and in the open state in which the middle opening is performed, the winning of the game ball in the large winning opening is easier than in the short opening. In the open state in which the long opening is performed, it is easier to win the game ball in the big winning opening than in the middle opening.
Further, the number of times and the time of opening the first special winning opening 36 in the opening and closing pattern A are not limited to those described above. For example, one open state is not limited to 14 s, and may be less than 14 s or more than 14 s, and a time during which a specified number of winnings can be achieved can be appropriately adopted. Further, the number of times of the open state is not limited to two times, and may be one time or three times or more.
Further, the long opening (the latter part) in which the V prize can be won may be divided into a plurality of times. In other words, in the latter half part, a closed state (closed time) of one or a plurality of first special winning openings may be provided. For example, the long open (open time 14 s) may be set to an open state (open time 5 s), a closed state (close time 1 s), and an open state (open time 9 s). According to this configuration, it becomes possible (easy) for the game ball to reach the rolling area 372 during the closing time of the newly provided first special winning opening 36A (in other words, the game ball becomes the first one). The chance of passing through the special winning opening 36B increases), and it becomes easy to win the V in the latter half part.

The opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which the opening state is performed only once and continues for 14 s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, one long opening occurs, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 14 s.
Note that the number and time of the open state of the first special winning opening 36 in the opening / closing pattern B are not limited to those described above. For example, one open state is not limited to 14 s, and may be less than 14 s or more than 14 s, and a time during which a specified number of winnings can be achieved can be appropriately adopted. Further, the number of times of the open state is not limited to one time, and may be plural times.
Further, the opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern B may be open for the same time, or the opening / closing pattern B may be open for a longer time than the opening / closing pattern A.

The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state lasts only once for 1 s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern C, the middle opening occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 1 s.
The number of times and the time of opening the first special winning opening 36 in the opening / closing pattern C are not limited to those described above. For example, one open state is not limited to 1 s, and may be less than 1 s or more than 1 s, and a predetermined number of prize winning times can be appropriately adopted. Further, the number of times of the open state is not limited to one time, and may be plural times.
The open pattern is not limited to the above three patterns. Two or less types may be provided, or four or more types may be provided. However, when four or more types of opening / closing patterns of the special winning opening are provided, it is preferable to provide a number of hits corresponding to the provided number.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, an operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific area 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open / close state of the first big winning opening 36 regardless of the big hitting game state and the small hitting game state. As shown in FIG. 60, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern) is such that, after an operation period in which the specific area 38A is opened for 0.1 s first, the specific area 38A is closed in principle. There is a non-operating period of 18 s, and an operating pattern of continuing to be in the open state is defined as an operating pattern that lasts for 15 s. The total operation time of the displacement member operation pattern is 15.1 s.
In the operation period of 0.1 s, since the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively short, it is extremely difficult to win a V in the specific area 38A. On the other hand, in the maximum operation period of 15 s, the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively long, so that the V prize in the specific area 38A is relatively easy.
In the operation period of 15 s, in one round in which the first special winning opening 36 is opened and closed, the first special winning opening 36 is closed when the large winning opening count reaches the maximum winning number, for example. After a predetermined monitoring processing time for the remaining sphere described later has elapsed, the displacement member 39 may be deactivated and the specific area 38A may be closed even before the predetermined 15 s has elapsed.

[Grand Winner opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a description will be given of the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 61, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 3 are defined as a special winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). The “hit pattern 1” is generated when the bonuses “probable change big hit 1” to “probable change big hit 4” and the specified round number is 5R.
In addition, the interval between rounds is a section in which the special winning opening is closed after the special winning opening is finally closed in one round until the special winning opening is first opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the drawing, an interval pattern a in which the closed state time (closed time) is 1.3 s is defined as an inter-round interval pattern.
In the “hit pattern 1”, the intervals between all rounds are the interval patterns “a”, the first special winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the first round, and the first special winning opening 36 in all the second to fifth Rs. Is defined to be the opening / closing pattern B. That is, the “hit pattern 1” is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is possible in the 1R.

  The “hit pattern 2” is generated when the bonuses “probable change big hit 5” to “probable change big hit 9” and the specified round number is set to 8R. In the “hit pattern 2”, the intervals between all rounds are the interval patterns a, and the first special winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in each of the 1R to 7R, and the first special winning opening 36 in the 8R. Is defined as opening / closing pattern A. That is, the “hit pattern 2” is executed as a round in which the V prize in the specific area 38A can be performed at the 8R.

  The "winning pattern 3" is generated at the time of the bonus "small hit 1", and is defined so that the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern C only once. That is, in the “hit pattern 3”, there is a possibility that a game ball wins in the first big winning opening 36 and there is a V winning in the specific area 38A, but if there is a V winning in the specific area 38A. Even if it does, it is executed as it cannot be shifted to the probable change game state.

In addition, although the opening / closing pattern is previously associated with each round in each hit pattern, an opening / closing pattern other than the above may be associated. For example, the first R pattern in the “hit pattern 1” may be the opening / closing pattern B instead of the opening / closing pattern A.
Also, two or more types of interval patterns may be used. The time of the interval pattern a may be a time other than the above.
In addition, the same round may be performed for all jackpots. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that all the big hits are set to 8R, 6R to 8R are set to the opening / closing pattern B for "hit pattern 1", and 2R to 8R are set to the opening / closing pattern B for "hit pattern 3". Since the “hit pattern 2” is 8R, an opening / closing pattern as shown in FIG. 61 can be employed.

[Game state determination table]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a gaming state determination table. The game state determination table is a table referred to in the processing of S1096 and the processing of S1100 of the main CPU 61 described later. In the gaming state determination table, the number of times reduced after the end of the big hit is defined according to the big hit symbol and the game state before the shift to the big hit.
For example, at the end of the jackpot of the jackpot symbol “probable change 1”, if the gaming state before the transition of the jackpot is the non-probable change / non-time saving game state, if the V-prize is won during the jackpot, the number of time savings is 0. If it is determined that no V prize is won during the big hit, 30 times are determined as the number of time savings (first record).
Also, for example, at the end of the jackpot of the jackpot symbol "probable change 1", if the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot is the non-probable change / time saving game state, and if a V-prize is won during the jackpot, the number of times of time saving is 50 times. Is determined, and if no V prize is won during the big hit, 30 times are determined as the number of time savings (second record).

In the game state determination table, four types of time reductions “0”, “30”, “50”, and “100” are defined, but the number is not limited to this, and other values are defined. You may.
Regardless of whether or not a V prize has been won, the value may be specified so that the number of time savings is always given to all or some of the big hits, or the number of time savings is not always given to all or some of the big hits A value may be specified.
Regardless of whether or not a V prize has been won, there is a jackpot in which the number of time savings is given. However, in all jackpots, the time savings is given in one of the cases with and without the V prize, and the time savings in the other is The value may be specified so as not to be given.

[Gaming state of game machine and effect mode]
Next, the gaming state and the effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the game state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

As shown in FIG. 63, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a normal mode, a special mode, a first special mode, a second special mode, and a third special mode as effect modes in the normal game state. I have.
The normal mode is an effect mode in a non-probable change game state or a probable change game state and a non-time saving game state. In the normal mode, an effect having an impression different from any of the first to third special modes and the special mode is performed.

In the normal mode, a big hit based on the first special symbol is achieved, and after the big hit is completed, the effect mode is shifted from the normal mode to any one of the special mode, the first special mode, and the second special mode.
More specifically, if the number of time savings is not given in the big hit, the mode is shifted to the special mode. If the number of time savings given in the big hit is 30 or 50, the mode is shifted to the first special mode. If the number of time savings given in the big hit is 100, the probability of 9/10 is increased. To shift to the first special mode (* Condition 1). On the other hand, if the number of times saved in the big hit is 100, the mode is shifted to the second special mode with a probability of 1/10 (* condition 2).
Note that the transition ratio of the effect mode is not limited to the above value. For example, if the number of time savings given in the big hit is 100, the transition ratio may be set so as to always (forcefully) transition to the second special mode.

  In the normal mode, a big hit based on the second special symbol occurs, and after the big hit ends, the normal mode may be shifted to another effect mode. The details will be described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the second special symbol in the normal mode is determined when the lottery is won by the lottery with the reserved ball of the special symbol game related to the second special symbol (the big hit lottery according to the second special symbol). If you win).

The special mode is an effect mode in a non-probable change game state or a probable change game state and a non-time saving game state. In the special mode, as in the normal mode, an effect different from the other effect modes is performed.
In the special mode, a big hit based on the first special symbol is achieved, and after the big hit is completed, the effect mode is shifted similarly to the normal mode.
In the special mode, when the number of games (the number of games in the special symbol game) has been exhausted 30 times, the effect mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode.

The first special mode is an effect mode in the non-probable changing game state or the probable changing game state and the time saving game state (the number of time savings is any of “30”, “50”, and “100”). In the first special mode, an effect is provided in which it is possible to identify the time saving gaming state, but it is difficult to identify whether the gaming state is the probable changing gaming state.
In the first special mode, a big hit is made based on the second special symbol, and after the big hit ends, the mode may shift from the first special mode to another effect mode. The details will be described later.
In the first special mode, when the time-saving gaming state ends, the effect mode is shifted from the first special mode to the normal mode.

The second special mode is an effect mode in the non-probable changing game state or the probable changing game state and the time saving game state (the number of time savings is “100”). In the second special mode, an effect is provided in which it is possible to identify the time saving gaming state, but it is difficult to identify whether the gaming state is the probable changing gaming state.
Since the effect of the second special mode is an effect performed when the number of times of savings is given 100 times, according to the effect of the second special mode, the player is notified that the number of times of savings of 100 times has been given. Recognizable.
Note that the effect of the first special mode can also be performed when the number of times saved is 100 times. Therefore, the player expects that the number of times of time saved is 100 times even in the first special mode. it can.
In the second special mode, there is a big hit based on the second special symbol, and after the big hit is finished, the mode may be shifted from the second special mode to another effect mode, the details of which will be described later.
Further, in the second special mode, when the time-saving gaming state ends, the effect mode is shifted from the second special mode to the normal mode.

The third special mode is an effect mode in the non-probable changing game state or the probable changing game state and the time saving game state (the number of time savings is “100”). When the effect mode of the game state before the transition to the big hit of the second special symbol is the third special mode, an effect (more broadly, a notification in a broader sense) is performed at the big hit. In other words, the third special mode is an effect mode characterized by interest to the player. More specifically, an effect is provided in which the player can acquire a greater number of time reductions, and if the number of time reductions that can be given is the same, an effect of prompting the V prize is provided. Done.
In the third special mode, there is a big hit based on the second special symbol, and after the big hit is finished, the mode may be shifted from the third special mode to another effect mode, the details of which will be described later.
In the third special mode, when the time saving game state ends, the effect mode is shifted from the third special mode to the normal mode.

  Next, in any one of the normal mode, the first special mode to the third special mode, a jackpot based on the second special symbol (any one of “probably variable big hit 5” to “probably variable big hit 9”) is obtained. A description will be given of the effect mode shifted to after the end.

(In the case of "probable big hit 5" or "probable big hit 6")
In the case where the number of time savings given in the big hit is 30 or 50, the effect mode is shifted to the first special mode (* condition 3). If the number of hours saved in the jackpot is 100, basically, the production mode is shifted to the first special mode with a probability of 9/10 (* condition 3) and a probability of 1/10 To shift to the third special mode (* Condition 4). However, when the effect mode before the transition to the big hit is the third special mode, if 100 times are given as the number of times of saving, the mode is forcibly shifted to the third special mode (* condition 4). If the number of times saved is not given in the big hit, the effect mode is shifted to the normal mode.

(In the case of "Probable change big hit 7")
After the end of the big hit, basically, the production mode is shifted to the first special mode with a probability of 1/10 (* condition 5), and is shifted to the second special mode with a probability of 7/10 (* condition). 6) The mode is shifted to the third special mode with a probability of 2/10 (* Condition 7). However, when the effect mode before the start of the big hit is the third special mode, the mode is forcibly shifted to the third special mode (* condition 7). If the number of times saved is not given in the big hit, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.
Note that the transition ratio of the effect mode is not limited to the above value. For example, the shift ratio may be set so as to forcibly shift to the second special mode.

(In the case of "probable variable big hit 8" or "probable variable big hit 9")
In the case where the number of time savings given in the big hit is 100, the effect mode is shifted to the second special mode with a probability of 1/10 (* condition 8) and the third special mode with a probability of 9/10. (* Condition 9). If the number of times saved is not given in the big hit, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.
Note that the effect mode before the start of the big hit is the third special mode, and the above-mentioned transition ratio is the same even if 100 times are given as the number of time savings in the big hit. The transition ratio of the effect mode is not limited to the above value. For example, when 100 times are given as the number of times saved in a big hit, the shift ratio may be set so as to forcibly shift to the second special mode.

[Control by Main CPU and Sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 and the sub CPU 71 of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 69 show processing by the main CPU 61, and FIGS. 70 to 77 show processing by the sub CPU 71. The description of the same or similar processing as the processing described in the first embodiment will be simplified or omitted as appropriate.

The main CPU 61 includes a game state transition control unit, a probable change game state control unit, a non-probability change game state control unit, a frequency determination unit, a time saving game state control unit, a non-time saving game state control unit, and a round game execution unit (first round game Various means such as an execution means and a second round game execution means) are realized.
For example, the main CPU 61 functions as a game state transition control unit capable of controlling transition to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player on condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner. Further, for example, in the big hit game state, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means, after the big hit game state ends, the identification information It functions as a probable change game state control means capable of controlling to a probable change game state having a relatively high probability of stop display. Further, for example, in the big hit game state, based on the fact that the game medium has not passed through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means, the main CPU 61 identifies the big hit game state and ends in the specific mode. It functions as a non-probable variable game state control means that can control the non-probable variable game state in which the probability of the information being stopped and displayed is relatively low. Further, for example, the main CPU 61 functions as a number-of-times determining means capable of determining any number from a plurality of times. Further, for example, the main CPU 61 functions as a time-short game state control means capable of controlling to a time-short game state including a state in which the opening / closing member is relatively easily opened after the big hit game state ends. Further, for example, the main CPU 61 sets the opening / closing member in the relatively open state on the condition that the number of times the identification information is variably displayed after being controlled to the time-saving gaming state becomes the number determined by the number-of-times determining means. It functions as a non-time saving game state control means that can be controlled to a non-time saving game state including a state that is difficult to become.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by the main CPU 61. The timer update process of FIG. 64 is configured by substantially the same steps as the timer update process of FIG. 20, but differs in that the process of S80 of the first embodiment is not provided in the timer update process. This is because in the present embodiment, winning rounds are not fixed.
That is, when the main CPU 61 makes an affirmative determination in the determination process of S1007 or makes an affirmative determination in the determination process of S1009, in S1010, the control status flag indicates a value indicating the process of opening the special winning opening (S1010). 04H).

[Special design related switch check processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol-related switch check process of FIG. 65 is configured by substantially the same steps as the special symbol-related switch check process of FIG. 22. However, in the special symbol-related switch check process, the process of S103 of the first embodiment is provided. Not that different. This is because, in the present embodiment, the second special winning opening 37A is not provided.
That is, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol-related switch check processing routine when ending the first prize port switch check processing in S1022.

[First big win switch check process]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a first big winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first special winning opening switch check processing of FIG. 66 is configured in substantially the same steps as the first special winning opening switch check processing of FIG. 25, but the first special winning opening switch check processing is the first embodiment. The timing at which the process of S135 is performed is different from the determination content of the determination process of S136. Regarding the processing timing, in the present embodiment, the specific area passage command is not supplied to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 at the time of the small hit. On the other hand, the content of the determination is a change due to the elimination of the probability change control at the time of the small hit.
That is, in S1035, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the special winning opening counter is equal to or greater than “1”. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening counter is equal to or more than “1”, the process proceeds to S1036, and when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening counter is not equal to or more than “1”. , The process is moved to S1042.
After ending the process of S1040, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a fixed area passage command in S1041. If this process ends, the process moves to S1042.

[Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the special symbol display time management processing executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol display time management processing of FIG. 66 is configured by substantially the same steps as the special symbol display time management processing of FIG. 31. However, in the special symbol display time management processing, the processing content of S230 of the first embodiment is different from that of FIG. different.
That is, in S1060, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (eg, storing) a game state command in the main RAM 63. The game status command includes a command type (information indicating that the command is a game status command), a game status (non-probable change / non-time saving, probable change / non-time saving, non-probable change / time saving, probable change / time saving), and the number of probable changes. Is a command including information indicating the remaining number of times (“0”) and information indicating the remaining number of times (“0”, “20”, or “70”) as the number of times saved. The game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub-CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 70, so that the sub-control circuit 70 recognizes the state of the probable change game state and the time saving game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S1061.

[Processing while opening the big winning opening]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. The processing during opening of the special winning opening shown in FIG. 68 is configured in substantially the same steps as the processing during opening of the special winning opening shown in FIG. 34. However, in the processing during opening of the special winning opening, the processing of S276 of the first embodiment is provided. Not that different. This is because, in the present embodiment, the second special winning opening 37A is not provided.
That is, when the process of setting the predetermined value to the remaining sphere monitoring timer in S1075 ends, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S1076.

[Winning end interval management processing]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the hit end interval management processing executed by the main CPU 61. The hit end interval management processing of FIG. 69 is configured by substantially the same steps as the hit end interval management processing of FIG. 35. However, in the hit end interval management processing of FIG. 69, steps S295, S296, and S300 of the first embodiment are performed. Processing contents are different.
That is, in S1095, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “30” as the number of STs to the value of the probability change counter of the main RAM 63. The value to be set is not limited to “30”, and another value may be adopted. If this process ends, the process moves to S1096.
In step S1096, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value (any one of “0”, “30”, “50”, and “100”) as the number of time savings in the value of the time saving number counter of the main RAM 63. . More specifically, the main CPU 61 determines a predetermined value based on the type of the big hit (big hit symbol), the game state before the shift to the big hit, and the presence or absence of the V prize using the game state determining table shown in FIG. I do. If this process ends, the process moves to S1097.
In S1100, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value (any one of “0”, “30”, “50”, and “100”) to the value of the time saving counter of the main RAM 63. Note that this processing is the same as the processing of S1096, and thus the description is omitted. If this process ends, the process moves to S1101.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by sub CPU 71. The timer update process of FIG. 70 is configured by substantially the same steps as the timer update process of FIG. 40, but the timer update process differs from the process of S357 in the first embodiment.
That is, in S1117, the sub CPU 71 performs a firing notification flag setting process and switches the firing notification mode. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 sets “02H” when the current value is “01H”, sets “04H” when the current value is “03H”, If the value is "04H", "03H" is set. If this process ends, the process moves to S1118. The firing notification flag is a flag that allows the sub CPU 71 to identify whether or not to perform the notification of the launch of the game ball. In the case of “00H”, the notification is not performed (terminated), and other than “00H” In the case of, the notification is performed (continued).
In the present embodiment, when the value of the launch notification flag is “01H”, the notification of “first half part” is performed, and when the value of the launch notification flag is “02H”, the notification of “second half part” is performed. When the value of the notification flag is "03H", a notification indicating that the firing operation is to be stopped ("DANGER", "Please wait", etc.) is performed, and when the value of the firing notification flag is "04H", the start of the firing operation is started. Informative information (“right strike”, “strike!”, Etc.) is performed. When the value of the launch alert flag is “05H”, “right strike” is informed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The command analysis process of FIG. 71 is configured by substantially the same steps as the command analysis process of FIG. 41. However, this command analysis process does not include the first effect mode change process of S364 of the first embodiment. The processing content of S366 is different. In the command analysis process, the first effect mode change process is not provided, and the name of the second effect mode change process in S378 of the first embodiment is changed to "effect mode change process" (S1137).
That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a stopped symbol determination process in S1125. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration design is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration design data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

The decorative patterns to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers “1” to “9”, and a predetermined number of these decorative patterns (numbers) (for example, three (3) Basically, the game shifts to the jackpot game state when the same digit ()) is obtained with the same decorative pattern (number).
More specifically, "probable change 1" to "probable change 4" as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol, "probable change 5" to "probable change 9" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol, and as the small hit symbol With regard to “small hit 1”, the decorative pattern corresponding to “probable change 7” is a set of numbers “7”, decorations corresponding to “probable change 1” to “probable change 6”, “probable change 8”, and “probable change 9”. The symbol is any of the numbers "1" to "6", "8", or "9", and the decorative pattern corresponding to "small hit 1" is a combination of the specific symbol "- The decorative pattern corresponding to the specific result and the loss of “-” is a random pattern other than the specific result. In addition, the stop symbol does not have to correspond to the specific symbol.
As described above, the decorative patterns corresponding to each of “probable change 1” to “probable change 6”, “probable change 8”, and “probable change 9” are numbers “1” to “6”, “8”, or “ By adopting a configuration in which any of the 9th alignments may be used, when the decorative symbols of the alignments other than the 7th alignment stop, from the stop symbol, the “probable change 1” to “probable change”. It is not known which jackpot is “probable change 6”, “probable change 8”, or “probable change 9”.

[Winning effect pattern determination processing]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the hit effect pattern determination processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit effect pattern determination processing in FIG. 72 is configured with substantially the same steps as the hit effect pattern determination processing in FIG. 42, but the actual hit pattern determination processing differs in the processing content of S390 in the first embodiment.
That is, in S1150, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any one of “01H” to “05H” to the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designating information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S1151. Here, “01H” corresponds to “probable change 1” to “probable change 4”, “02H” corresponds to “probable change 5” and “probable change 6”, “03H” corresponds to “probable change 7”, and “ “04H” corresponds to “probable change 8” and “probable change 9”, and “05H” corresponds to “small hit 1”.

[V Prize notification processing]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the V winning award notification processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The V winning award notification process is a process for notifying the V winning award, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in S1160, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning flag is “01H”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 ends the V winning notification processing routine. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the V winning flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1161.

  In S1161, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the V winning notification flag to “01H”. The V prize notification flag is an internal flag indicating whether or not a V prize notification has been made. When the notification of the V prize is performed, “01H” is set as the value of the V prize notification flag, and when the notification of the V prize is not performed, “00H” is set as the value of the V prize notification flag. You. If this process ends, the process moves to S1162.

  In S1162, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “05H” to the value of the launch notification flag. By this processing, the notification “right-handed” corresponding to “05H” is performed in the processing of S1180 in FIG. 74. If this process ends, the process moves to S1163.

  In S1163, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the firing notification timer. When this process is over, the V winning notification process routine is finished.

[Round production process]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the mid-round effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The in-round effect process is a process for determining the effect content for each round, and is executed in the following step units.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in S1170, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S1171.

  In S1171, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the V winning has been notified. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1180. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1172.

  In S1172, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not “small hit 1”. When determining that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1180. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 1173.

  In S1173, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the round counter is “1” or “8”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the round (1R or 8R) during which the V prize is possible. When determining that the value of the round counter is “1” or “8”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1174. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the round counter is neither “1” nor “8”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1179.

  In S1174, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “05H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode before the transition to the big hit is the third special mode. When determining that the value of the effect mode flag is “05H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1175. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the effect mode flag is not “05H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1177.

  In S1175, the sub CPU 71 sets the launch notification flag to “03H” or “04H”. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the launch notification flag according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. For example, "04H" is set when the former part has a larger number of time savings, and "03H" is set when the latter part has a larger number of time savings. If this process ends, the process moves to S1176. Note that if both are the same, “03H” is set in order to encourage a V prize. However, if fraudulent activity is detected (radio wave detection, magnetic detection, etc.), “04H” is set. By doing so, it may be configured so as to be disadvantageous to the wrongdoer.

  In S1176, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value to the value of the firing notification timer. For example, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to Y seconds (15 seconds) shorter than X seconds (18 seconds), which is the time from when the displacement member 39 starts opening for the first time to when the V member can perform the V winning long opening. . The predetermined value Y seconds related to the launch notification time is set in consideration of, for example, reaching the approximate center of the rolling area 372 in 2 to 2.1 seconds from the start of “right-hand” (start of the launch operation). Things. For example, if the firing operation is performed in accordance with the “right strike” displayed after the lapse of 15 seconds, after about 2 seconds, the first special winning opening has not been long opened yet, and the game ball is basically , Reaches the rolling region 372. That is, a game ball that has been “right-handed” in accordance with the notification that is triggered by the firing notification time is not detected by the first special winning opening first count switch 360A, but is detected by the first special winning opening second count switch 360B. Can be detected. In addition, since the firing interval of the game balls is 0.66 seconds, when the game balls are continuously fired, a plurality of the game balls reach the rolling area 372 and the first special winning opening second. It can be detected by the count switch 360B. If this process ends, the process moves to S1180. The present embodiment is not limited to the above-described processing, and may be a value larger than the above-mentioned value “15” or a smaller value. However, it is preferable to set a time that does not end the round before winning the V. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, a section where the open state is 0.1 s or less is short-opened, a section where the open state is longer than 0.1 s and less than 14 s is middle open, and a section where the open state is 14 s or more. Is called a long open.

  In S1177, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the launch notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S1178.

  In S1178, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value to the value of the firing notification timer. Note that this processing is the same as the processing in S1176, and a description thereof will be omitted. If this process ends, the process moves to S1180.

  In S1179, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “05H” to the value of the launch notification flag. Since only the first half of the second to seventh rounds is set, the value “05H” indicating right-handed is set. If this process ends, the process moves to S1180.

  In S1180, the sub CPU 71 sets the round effect data according to the winning effect pattern and the round. In order to recognize the hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern. However, the same effect pattern may be executed. When this processing is ended, the in-round effect processing routine is ended.

[Round effect processing]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the round effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. In the inter-round effect processing of FIG. 75, the processing contents of S420, S421, and S422 of the first embodiment are mainly different. Note that S1190 to S1192 are processes for temporarily terminating the current launch notification when no V prize has been won.
In S1190, sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1193. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1191.

  In S1191, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the launch notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S1192.

  In S1192, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the firing notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S1193.

[Win end effect processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the hit end effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the hit end interval at the end of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in the following step units.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in S1200, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the firing notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S1201.

  In S1201, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the firing notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S1202.

  In S1202, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the round counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S1203.

  In S1203, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the V winning notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S1204.

  In S1204, the sub CPU 71 sets the hit effect pattern and the hit end effect data according to the round. In order to recognize the end hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern, but it may be configured to execute the same effect pattern. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[Direction mode change processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the effect mode change process executed by sub CPU 71. This effect mode change process is a process for changing the effect mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in S1210, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “00H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the game state command is based on the time saving and / or the probability change. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “00H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1211. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “00H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1213.

  In S1211, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the remaining working hours indicated by the gaming state command is one or more. When determining that the value of the effect mode flag is “01H”, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect mode change processing routine. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is not “01H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1212.

  In S1212, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the effect mode flag. By this processing, the effect mode is shifted to the normal mode. When this process ends, the production mode change processing routine ends.

  In S1213, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “05H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not “small hit 1” has ended. When determining that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “05H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1216. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “05H”, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1214.

  In S1214, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect mode transition determination process. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to shift the effect mode based on at least one of the number of times of saving time (number of times of saving time) and the current effect mode (effect mode before the big hit). In the following, the transition of the effect mode based on the number of time savings provided and the effect mode before the big hit will be described.

(When the number of working hours is 0, and the production mode does not matter)
The sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the special mode when the big hit of the first special symbol ends, and determines to shift to the normal mode when the big hit of the second special symbol ends.

(When the number of working hours = "30" or "50", and the production mode is not questioned)
The sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the first special mode in the case of either the end of the first special symbol big hit or the end of the second special symbol big hit.

(Time savings = "100" for normal mode)
If the first special symbol “probable change 3” is the end of the big hit, the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode is to be shifted to the first special mode with a probability of “9/10”, and is determined to be “1/10” with a probability of “1/10”. 2 It is determined to shift to the special mode. If the second special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the third special mode.

(Time savings = "100", 3rd special mode)
The sub CPU 71 determines whether the second special symbol “probable change 9” is the end of the big hit or the second special symbol “probable change 9” is the end of the big hit, with a probability of “1/10”. The mode is determined to be shifted to the third special mode with a probability of “9/10”. In addition, if neither the end of the big hit of the second special symbol “probable change 8” nor the end of the big hit of the second special symbol “probable change 9”, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the third special mode. .

(In the case of the number of working hours = “100”, the first special mode, the second special mode, or the special mode)
If the first special symbol “probable change 3” is the end of the big hit, the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode is to be shifted to the first special mode with a probability of “9/10”, and is determined to be “1/10” with a probability of “1/10”. 2 It is determined to shift to the special mode.
If either the end of the big hit of the second special symbol “probable change 5” or the end of the big hit of the second special symbol “probable change 6”, the sub CPU 71 sets the second special symbol “9/10” with a probability of “9/10”. It is determined to shift to the mode, and to shift to the third special mode with a probability of “1/10”.
If the second special symbol “probable change 7” is the end of the big hit, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the first special mode with a probability of “1/10”, and determines the first special mode with a probability of “7/10”. It is determined to shift to the second special mode, and to shift to the third special mode with a probability of “2/10”.
The sub CPU 71 determines whether the second special symbol “probable change 9” is the end of the big hit or the second special symbol “probable change 9” is the end of the big hit, with a probability of “1/10”. The mode is determined to be shifted to the third special mode with a probability of “9/10”.
In the present embodiment, the probability associated with the mode transition is indicated as “x / y”, but the probability is realized by performing a predetermined random number lottery.

  In S1215, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value according to the determination result to the value of the effect mode flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S1216.

  In S1216, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When this process ends, the production mode change processing routine ends.

  The sub CPU 71 implements various means such as effect mode determination means and effect execution means.

78 and 79 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect screen and an effect screen flow. Hereinafter, the case where the effect mode is shifted in the order of the normal mode, the special mode, and the normal mode (first case), the case where the effect mode is shifted in the order of the normal mode, the first special mode, the third special mode, and the normal mode (second case) Case) will be described as an example, and the characteristic effects of the present embodiment will be described.
SC101 to SC144 are presentation contents displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the components on the screen are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

(First case)
SC101 shows a mode in which the decorative symbols fluctuate in the normal mode. In this example, since the lottery of the first special symbol has been won, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped (SC102), and the fact that the big hit has been reached is displayed on the screen (SC103). An effect is performed (SC104 to SC1110).
In this case, since the number of time savings was not given in the big hit (the number of time savings is 0), the effect mode was changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and the effect was changed to the special mode on the screen (“special mode”). "Rush-in" etc.) (SC111).
Thereafter, the game progresses, and the number of games (the number of games in the special symbol game) is exhausted 30 times (SC112 to SC113), the effect mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode (SC114), and the game is performed in the normal mode. (SC115).

(2nd case)
SC101 to SC110 are the same as in the first case. In this case, since the number of time savings of 30 is given in the big hit of the first special symbol, the production mode is shifted from the normal mode to the first special mode. On the screen, an effect indicating that the mode has been shifted to the first special mode (“entering the first special mode” or the like) is performed (SC116).

After that, the game progresses to a jackpot of “probable change 8” (SC117 to SC120), and an effect is performed in the jackpot (SC121 to SC125). In the big hit, more precisely, in the big hits of “probable change 8” and “probable change 9” in which the ratio of shifting to the third special mode is high, the V prize is possible on the 8th R, and the specific An effect (“Next round, catching time savings by one's own power”) is performed (SC123).
In the big hit, since the V prize is possible in the second half of the 8R, a notification regarding the timing at which the V prize is possible (“first half part”, “second half part”, etc.) is performed (SC124, SC125).

Generally, when the player knows that the “first half part” effect is being performed on the screen, it is assumed that the number of won balls reaches 10 and the round ends. In order to avoid launching the game ball (winning), the game ball is fired and the aim is to win the V when the performance of the “second half part” is performed.
However, in the big hit, 0 or 100 times are determined as the number of time savings based on the gaming state before the shift to the big hit and the presence or absence of the V prize. It is determined whether or not to aim for a V winning based on the game.
According to this configuration, the player's own judgment leads to the acquisition of a profit (in this example, the number of working hours), so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the present example, the player wins V to win 100 times as the number of times saved and wins a predetermined lottery. Therefore, an effect of “V” is performed on the screen (SC126), and the effect mode is changed from the first special mode to the third special mode. The mode is shifted to the special mode (SC127).
After that, the game progresses to a jackpot of “Probable Change 7” (SC128 to SC131), and an effect is performed in the jackpot (SC132 to SC135). In the jackpot of “probable change 7”, regardless of the gaming state before the jackpot, 100 times are awarded as the number of time savings, so that an effect for promoting the V prize is performed at the 8th R where the V prize is possible. In other words, in the first half part where no V prize is obtained (V prize is difficult), an effect (“DANGER”, “please wait”, etc.) is performed for the first half part, and in the second half part where the V prize is easy, an effect prompting a prize ( "Right strike", "Strike- !!", etc.) are performed.
In this example, since the V prize has been acquired, a probable change / time saving game state is set. In the big hit of “probable change 7”, if the effect mode before the big hit is the third special mode, the third special mode is forcibly set (in other words, the third special mode is maintained). ).

  After that, the game progresses to a jackpot of “Probable Change 9” (SC137 to SC140), and an effect is performed at the jackpot (SC141 to SC143). In the big hit, since the player played the game ignoring the effect (in other words, the player has won the V), the effect mode is shifted from the third special mode to the normal mode (SC144).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the number of time savings is determined based on the gaming state determination table of FIG. Looking at the jackpot of “probable change 9” in the gaming state determination table, if the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot is the probable change / time saving game state, the number of time savings will not be given when the player wins a V at the jackpot. When no V prize is won, 100 times are awarded as the number of times saved. On the other hand, when looking at the effect mode, if the game state before the transition to the big hit in the big hit of “probability change 9” is the probability change / time saving game state and the effect mode is the third special mode, the number of time savings is not given. In this case, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when 100 times are given as the number of time savings, the third special mode is maintained. In other words, if the player wins a V in the jackpot of “probable change 9”, the number of times saved is not given, the effect mode is shifted to the normal mode, and the player is disadvantaged. If the player does not win the V, The number of times of saving of time is given 100 times, and the third special mode is maintained, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the present embodiment, at the 8R of the big hit, it is difficult (impossible) to win a V in the first half part, and it is easy (possible) to win a V in the second half part. Therefore, in this example, in order to prevent the V prize, an effect of prompting the launch of the game ball in the first half part (“right strike”, “hit-!”, Etc.) is performed (SC141), and the game ball is placed in the second half part. (“DANGER”, “Please wait”, etc.) are performed (SC142).
However, since the player has made the V prize, an effect to the effect that the player has won the V is performed (SC143), and an effect to the effect that the effect mode has been shifted from the third special mode to the normal mode is performed (SC144).

  Next, another mode (modification) of the winning device mechanism according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the first mode of the winning device mechanism includes a first special winning opening first count switch 360A, a first special winning opening second count switch 360B, a first special winning opening shutter 361A, and a first special winning opening shutter 361A. This is realized by including the first winning opening shutter 361B, the second winning opening shutter 371A, the rolling area 372, the specific area 38A, the non-specific area 38B, the outlets 38X and 38Y, and the displacement member 39.
Here, the shutters (the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the first special winning opening shutter 361B, and the second special winning opening shutter 371A) are opened and closed (driven) according to the pattern shown in FIG. At this time, the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B perform the opening and closing operation (driving) at the same time as opening and closing the first special winning opening 36A and the first special winning opening 36B. The winning opening shutter 371A opens and closes when opening and closing the second winning opening 37A.
The difference from the winning device mechanism of FIG. 57 is that a second big winning opening shutter 371A is provided. Since the second special winning opening shutter 371A is provided, in a state where the second special winning opening shutter 371A is opened, the game ball passes through the second special winning opening 37A and is located on the back side of the main winning mechanism. Be guided. Further, in the present winning mechanism, for example, the opening state is controlled in the order of the second special winning opening and the first special winning opening, and one of the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening is in the closed state. When the right-handed operation is started after the big hit is started by setting the time from the displacement to the opening state of the other to an extremely short time (for example, 0.1 second), the first big winning opening first By being detected by the count switch 360A or a switch that detects a game ball that has won the second large winning opening (not shown), detection by the first large winning opening second count switch 360B and passing through the specific area 38 are extremely difficult. You may comprise so that it may become. In other respects, the configuration is the same as that of the winning device mechanism of FIG. 57, and the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the second mode of the winning device mechanism is realized by including the same components as the winning device mechanism of the first mode. First big winning opening first count switch 360A, first big winning opening second count switch 360B, first big winning opening shutter 361A, first big winning opening shutter 361B, second big winning opening shutter 371A, rolling area 372 Are the same as in the first embodiment, but the arrangement of the specific area 38A, the non-specific area 38B, the outlets 38X and 38Y, and the displacement member 39 is different. In the winning mechanism, a displacement member 39, a specific area 38A, and an outlet 38X are sequentially provided on the left side of the lowermost partition, and a non-specific area 38B and an outlet 38Y are sequentially provided on the right side of the partition. ing.
In the present winning device mechanism, an inclined portion 410 is provided so that a game ball that has passed through the first special winning opening first count switch 360A can pass through the specific area 38A. That is, the winning mechanism is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 38A regardless of whether the vehicle passes through the first winning opening 36A or the first winning opening 36B. In addition, as for the length and angle of the inclined portion 410, an appropriate configuration can be adopted as long as a configuration capable of passing through the specific region 38A can be realized. The opening and closing operations (driving) of the shutters (the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the first special winning opening shutter 361B, and the second special winning opening shutter 371A) are the same as those in FIG. Description is omitted.

<Effect obtained by the above-described configuration>
According to the above-described configuration, for example, the number of times reduced after the end of the big hit is defined in the gaming state determination table according to the big hit symbol and the game state before the shift to the big hit (FIG. 62). However, in a broader sense, the number of working hours after the end of the big hit may be defined according to the big hit symbol. For example, a specific jackpot game state may be provided, and if a V prize is given in the jackpot game state, 0 times may be given as the number of times saved, and if no V is won, 30 times may be given as the number of times saved. In other words, when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state, the first number (for example, 0) is determined as the number of times that the benefit of the time saving game state can be enjoyed, and the game ball passes through the specific area 38A. If not, a second number (for example, 30 times) greater than the first number may be determined. Therefore, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A after the end of the big hit gaming state, the second number of time-saving gaming states is performed. You can enjoy. In this way, by providing a possibility that a point where the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A becomes more advantageous than a case where the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the interest is improved. be able to.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state of “probable change 1” is the non-probable change / non-time saving game state, when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A , The first number (for example, 0 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, the second number (for example, 30 times) that is larger than the first number is determined (see FIG. 62 and the like). On the other hand, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state of “probable change 1” is the probable change / non-time saving game state, if the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the second number (for example, 30) Is determined, and if there is no passage, a first number (for example, 0) smaller than the second number is determined. As described above, in determining the number of times related to the time-saving gaming state, in addition to the presence / absence of the passing of the gaming ball to the specific area 38A, the gaming state before the shift to the big hit gaming state of “probable change 1” is taken into consideration, thereby being advantageous. Since the situation in which the degree becomes extremely low can be resolved, the interest can be further improved. In addition, if the game ball has passed to the specific area 38A, the second number is determined. If the game ball has not passed, the first number less than the second number may be determined. The point where the game ball does not pass does not necessarily have a point that is more advantageous than the case where the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, so that novel playability can be provided.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, the first variable prize device and the second variable prize device are provided with the same or nearly the same displacement mode as the “big change 1” big hit game state and the “big change 2” big hit game state. (FIGS. 58 to 61, etc.), it is difficult for the player to see which jackpot game state the player is in from the displacement mode of the variable winning device.
Also, in the jackpot game state of “probable change 1”, when the game state before shifting to the jackpot game state of “probable change 1” is the non-probable change / non-time saving game state, the passage of the game ball to the specific area 38A is prevented. If there is, a first number (for example, 0 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, a second number (for example, 30 times) greater than the first number is determined. On the other hand, in the jackpot game state of “probable change 2”, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state of “probable change 2” is the non-probable change / non-time saving game state, the passage of the game ball to the specific area 38A is prevented. If there is, a second number (for example, 30 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, a first number (for example, 0 times) smaller than the second number is determined.
In other words, by providing the jackpot game state of “probable change 1” and the jackpot game state of “probable change 2”, even if the result of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A is the same, the time reduction game state that can be enjoyed can be enjoyed. Benefits (eg, number, duration) can be different.
Therefore, the profit of the time-saving game state that can be enjoyed by the jackpot game state of “probable change 1” and the jackpot game state of “probable change 2” can be adjusted, so that the interest can be further improved. In addition, since it is difficult for the player to see which jackpot game state is in accordance with the displacement mode of the variable prize device, the player must enter the specific area 38A so as to always increase the profit of the time-saving game state that can be enjoyed. Since it becomes impossible to select whether or not a game ball passes, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is extremely advantageous and the game store is extremely disadvantageous.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state of “probable change 1” is the probable change / time saving game state, when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, One time (for example, 30 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, a second number (for example, 50 times) larger than the first number is determined. In other words, the state transition from the probable change / time saving game state to the “probable change 1” jackpot game state, and the transition to the probable change game state after the end of the “probable change 1” jackpot game state, are greater than the case of the “probable change 1” big hit. When the game state is shifted to the non-probable change game state after the end of the game state, the advantage of the time-saving game state can be more enjoyed, so that the situation in which the degree of advantage is significantly increased can be avoided.

In the above-described configuration, for example, in the gaming state determination table, the number of time savings after the end of the big hit is defined according to the big hit symbol and the game state before the shift to the big hit (FIG. 62). However, in a broader sense, the number of working hours after the end of the big hit may be defined according to the big hit symbol and whether or not the game state before shifting to the big hit is a certain-change game state. For example, when a special jackpot game state is provided and the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot is the probable change gaming state, if the player wins a V in the jackpot gaming state, the number of times reduced is 30 times. 50 times are given as the number of times, and if the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot is the non-probable variable gaming state, if the player wins a V in the jackpot gaming state, the number of times reduced is 50, and if the player does not win the V, the number of times reduced is reduced. 30 times may be given.
In other words, when the game state before the transition to the big hit game state is the probable change game state and the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the first number (for example, 30 times) is determined, and the passage is performed. If there is no, the second number (for example, 50 times) that is larger than the first number is determined. On the other hand, when the game state before the transition to the big hit game state is the non-probable change game state, if the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, a fourth number (for example, 50 times) is determined, If there is no passage, a third number (for example, 30 times) smaller than the fourth number is determined. As described above, in determining the number of times related to the time saving game state, in addition to the presence or absence of the game ball passing to the specific area 38A, the game state before the transition to the big hit game state is taken into consideration, and the game is enjoyed after the big hit game state ends. By making it possible to change the obtained time-saving game state, it is possible to improve the interest.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, the first variable prize device and the second variable prize device are provided with the same or nearly the same displacement mode as the “big change 1” big hit game state and the “big change 2” big hit game state. (FIGS. 58 to 61, etc.), it is difficult for the player to see which jackpot game state the player is in from the displacement mode of the variable winning device.
Also, for example, in the jackpot game state of “probable change 1”, when the game state before shifting to the jackpot game state of “probable change 1” is the probable change game state, the game ball has passed to the specific area 38A. In this case, a first number (for example, 30 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, a second number (for example, 50 times) larger than the first number is determined. On the other hand, in the jackpot game state of “probable change 2”, when the game state before shifting to the jackpot game state of “probable change 2” is the probable change game state, when the game ball passes to the specific area 38A, The second number (for example, 50 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, the first number (for example, 30 times) is determined.
In the big hit game state of “probable change 1”, when the game state before shifting to the big hit game state of “probable change 1” is the non-probable change game state, when a game ball passes to the specific area 38A. , A fourth number (for example, 50 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, a third number (for example, 30 times) smaller than the fourth number is determined. On the other hand, in the jackpot game state of “probable change 2”, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state of “probable change 2” is the non-probable change game state, there is a passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A. , The third number (for example, 30 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, the fourth number (for example, 50 times) is determined.
As described above, even if the result of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A is the same, it is possible to adjust the profit of enjoying the time-saving game state according to the type of the big hit game state, and eliminate the situation where the game becomes monotonous. As a result, the interest can be further improved. Furthermore, even if the player has sensed whether or not the gaming state before the transition to the big hit gaming state is the surely changing gaming state, the player can see which jackpot gaming state it is from the displacement mode of the variable winning device. Since it is difficult to perform the game, it is not possible to select whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 38A so that the profit that can be enjoyed in the time-saving gaming state is always increased. Extremely disadvantageous situations can be avoided.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, if the effect mode before shifting to the big hit gaming state is the third special mode, depending on the effect mode before shifting to the big hit gaming state, the specific area 38A is entered. (“DANGER”, “Please wait”, etc.) for the number of times determined based on the result of passing the game ball (“DANGER”, “Please wait”, etc.); , "Hit- !!" etc.)) (FIG. 79, etc.). According to this configuration, the player who has grasped the number of times determined based on the result of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A by the specific effect so that the player can enjoy the number of times related to the time-saving gaming state more can be obtained. Can be played based on a self-determination as to whether or not to allow the game ball to pass through. In this way, by directly linking the effect mode before the transition to the jackpot gaming state to the benefit to the player, novel playability can be provided.

In the above-described configuration, for example, in the big hit game state of “probable change 7”, the fifth number (for example, 100 times) is determined regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 38A. When the effect mode before the transition to the jackpot game state of “probable change 7” is the third special mode, a specific effect that prompts the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A (the effect of refraining from winning (“DANGER”, “DANGER”, “ Please wait for a while ”, etc.), and an effect that prompts a prize (“ right strike ”,“ hit-! ”, Etc.)) may be executed (FIG. 79, etc.).
With this configuration, when recognizing the specific effect, the player recognizes that the jackpot game state is “probable change 7”, passes the game ball to the specific area 38A, and ends the jackpot game state of “probable change 7”. Later, it is possible to enjoy the probable game state. In this way, by providing a specific effect that is advantageous to the player, a situation in which the game becomes monotonous can be resolved, and thus the interest can be further improved.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, a game ball can pass through the first special winning opening 36A and reach the first special winning opening 36B (FIG. 57 and the like). On the other hand, the game ball can pass through the specific area 38A when passing through the first big winning opening 36B. In other words, since the first large winning opening 36A can prevent the game ball from passing to the first large winning opening 36B, even if the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B can be passed for a long time, it is basically possible. The game ball can pass through the first big winning opening 36A, it is still difficult to pass to the specific area 38A, and it can be difficult to shift to the surely changing game state. In this way, in the jackpot game state in which it is difficult to shift to the probable change game state, by making it possible to pass through the first big winning opening 36A for a long time to allow a large number of game balls to pass, it becomes a significantly disadvantageous jackpot game state. Since the situation can be resolved, the interest can be improved.

  According to the above-described configuration, for example, the second special winning opening 37A is provided between the first special winning opening 36A and the first special winning opening 36B (FIG. 79 and the like). By providing the second special winning opening 37A in this manner, when the first special winning opening 36A is changed from the open state to the closed state, the first special winning opening 36A is passed over the first special winning opening 36A toward the first special winning opening 36B. Since the game ball can pass through the second special winning opening 37A, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the first special winning opening 36B. Further, in the present configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first special winning opening 36B can pass through the specific area 38A, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball will pass through the specific area 38A and be controlled to the certain-variable game state. Become.

  In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments, the technology in the other embodiments can be applied to each other as long as the characteristic configuration and the essential effect are not hindered.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Gaming board 1p Gaming area 4 Liquid crystal display device 32 1st starting port 33 2nd starting port 34 Blade member 35 Passage gate 36A, 36B, 36C 1st big winning opening 361A, 361B, 361C 1st big winning opening shutter 37A, 37B Second special winning opening 371A, 371B Second special winning opening shutter 38A Specific area 38B Non-specific area 39 Displacement member 53 First special symbol display unit 54 Second special symbol display unit 61 Main CPU
63 Main RAM
71 Sub CPU
73 Work RAM
83 Dispensing device

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area,
A variable winning device that is displaceable between a first state in which game media can be easily received and a second state in which game media cannot be easily received, and has a specific area through which game media can pass;
A passage area through which game media can pass,
An open state in which the game medium easily passes through the passage area, and an open / close member that can be displaced to a closed state in which the game medium hardly passes;
Display means capable of variably displaying identification information based on the passage of the game medium to the passage area;
On the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the display means, a game state transition control means capable of controlling transition to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player,
A round game execution means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning device is displaced between the first state and the second state in the big hit game state shifted under the control of the game state shift control means;
In the big hit game state shifted by the control of the game state shift control means, based on that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means, after the end of the big hit game state A probability change game state control means capable of controlling the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the display means is relatively high,
In the big hit game state shifted by the control of the game state shift control means, based on that the game medium did not pass through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means, the big hit game state After the end, non-probable variable game state control means capable of controlling to a non-probable variable game state having a relatively low probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the display means,
After the end of the big hit game state shifted by the control of the game state shift control means, a time-short game state control means that can be controlled to a time-short game state including a state in which the opening and closing member is relatively easily opened,
The number of times that the identification information is variably displayed by the display means after being controlled to the time-saving game state by the time-saving game state control means has a specific number of times, and the opening and closing member is relatively opened. Non-time saving game state control means that can be controlled to a non-time saving game state including a difficult state,
Production mode determination means capable of determining any of a plurality of production modes,
Effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means,
With
In the case where the game medium passes through the specific area and is controlled to the probable variable game state by the probable variable game state control means after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to control the specific number of probable variable game states and the time reduction game state. And
If the non-probable variable game state is controlled by the non-probable variable game state control means after the end of the big hit game state without passing the game medium to the specific area, the non-probable variable game state and the time saving game state of the specific number of times are controlled. It is possible to
In the case where the game medium passes through the specific area, and in the case where the game medium does not pass through the specific area, an effect mode that can be executed after the end of the big hit game state is provided,
The display of the identification information immediately before the start of the big hit gaming state that has shifted to the effect mode, is displayed during the effect mode immediately after the display that causes the shift to the effect mode is performed. Is possible,
The presentation execution means in the jackpot gaming state is shifted by the control of the gaming state transition control means only when rendering mode before transition to the jackpot gaming state is a specific effect mode, in the jackpot gaming state A gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect that prompts the game medium to be launched so that the game medium goes to the specific area before the game medium passes through the specific area.

Images